BT Meridian Norstar Compact Plus Release 3 Administation Guide

BT Meridian Norstar Compact Plus Release 3 Administation Guide
Working together
Norstar
Compact Plus Release 3
System Administration Guide
Published by Nortel Networks on behalf of British Telecommunications PLC. All
possible care has been taken in the preparation of this publication, but British
Telecommunications PLC assumes no liability for any inaccuracies that may occur.
British Telecommunication PLC reserves the right to make changes without notice both
to this publication and to the product that it describes.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a
retrieval system, or translated into any human or computer language in any form or by
any means without prior written permission of British Telecommunications PLC.
If you find any errors in this publication, or would like to make suggestions for its
improvement, please write to:
British Telecommunications
Norstar Product Manager
Weston House
246 High Holborn
London, WC1V 7DQ
British Telecom is a registered trademark of:
British Telecommunications PLC
Registered Office 81, Newgate Street
London, EC1A 7AJ
Registered in England, Number 1800000
Meridian, Companion, and Norstar are trademarks of Nortel.
Meridian Norstar Business Communication System is manufactured by Nortel.
Touchtone is a trademark of British Telecom.
This document is for use with Compact Plus Release 3 Norstar UK.
P0905531 Issue 01
Printed in Canada
©1999 Northern Telecom
i
Contents
SECTION I: System Administration 1
Introduction
3
Safety and Regulatory information 4
You must be the administrator 5
Here’s what you need to start programming 6
Understanding the telephone keys 7
Starting a programming session 9
Ending a programming session 9
Using passwords to access programming 9
Understanding your system 10
Map of Administrator Plus programming 10
SECTION II: System programming 13
System programming introduction
15
Conventions used in this guide 16
Programming overview 16
Using passwords 22
Programmable settings and features 24
Making suggestions 30
Advice Line 30
Programming Terminals and Extensions
Terminals and extensions 32
Assigning a line to an extension (line access) 32
Assigning line pool access 34
Assigning a Prime line to an extension 34
Assigning intercom keys to an extension 35
Assigning an Answer key to an extension 36
Setting the Originating Line Identification for an extension
Programming Hospitality Services
31
37
39
Common extension 40
Room extension 40
Hospitality Services admin telephone 40
Alarm time (AL) feature 40
Hospitality Services admin alarm feature 42
Room occupancy (RO) 43
Room condition (RC) 44
Service time 46
Network features
47
CLI blocking 48
Network Call Diversion 48
Selective Line Redirection 50
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
ii
Software Keys
53
Viewing the System ID
Software Keys 54
54
Setting System speed dial
57
Setting System speed dial 58
Assigning a number to a System speed dial code 58
Selecting a line 59
Setting the system to display a name instead of a number 59
Setting whether the speed dial number bypasses restrictions 60
Naming extensions and lines
Naming extensions
Naming lines 63
61
62
Changing the time and date
65
Changing the time and date 66
Changing the time 66
Changing the date 67
Changing the time and date using the Basic password
Changing the time by an hour 68
Automatic Time & Date 68
67
Assigning a Direct-Dial extension
69
Programming Direct-Dial 70
Programming an internal Direct-Dial extension 70
Programming an external Direct-Dial extension 71
Barring calls and privileges (Restrictions)
73
Using restriction filters to bar calls 74
Assigning filters to a telephone (Extn restrns) 77
Assigning filters to a line (Line restrns) 78
Assigning filters to a specific line/extension (Line/extn restrns)
Class of Service passwords 80
Assigning a remote access filter 83
Locking an extension 86
Preventing Last Number Redial 87
Preventing Saved Number Redial 88
Preventing Recall 89
Preventing Redirect 89
Programming capabilities
Programming an extension 92
Setting Call Forward no answer 92
Setting Call Forward on Busy 94
Programming Do Not Disturb on Busy 94
Programming Handsfree 95
Programming Handsfree answerback 96
Assigning a Pickup group 97
Assigning a page zone 97
Programming paging 98
Assigning telephones to the Direct-Dial extension
Allowing Priority call 99
Assigning a Hotline 100
Auxiliary ringer 101
Activating Redirect ring 101
Receive tones 102
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
79
91
98
P0905531 Issue 01
iii
Programming User preferences
105
Programming User preferences 106
Changing the key programming for an extension 106
Changing a personal (user) speed dial code 107
Changing the Call log options 107
Changing the dialling options 108
Changing the display language 109
Changing the display contrast 109
Changing the Ring type 110
Programming Hunt groups
111
Programming Hunt Groups 112
Adding or removing members from a group 113
Moving members of a group 113
Assigning or unassigning lines to a group 114
Setting the distribution mode 115
Setting the hunt delay 116
Programming options if all hunt members are busy
Programming the queue timeout 117
Programming the overflow extension 118
Setting the name 118
Checking hunt group metrics 119
116
Programming feature settings
Background music 122
On hold 122
Receiver volume 123
Camp timeout 123
Park timeout 124
Park mode 124
Transfer callback 125
Network callback 126
Held line reminder and delay
Conference tone 127
Directed (call) pickup 128
Page tone 128
Page timeout 129
Call log space 129
Alarm extension 130
Answer extension 131
121
126
Moving and copying
Extension relocation 134
Copying programming for telephones
133
135
Settings for analogue equipment
139
Settings for analogue equipment 140
Setting the delay before the ATA/I-ATA answers 140
Changing the dial mode of an ATA or an I-ATA 141
Setting whether the ATA/I-ATA should receive system tones
Setting whether an ATA is used on-site or off-site 142
Services
142
145
Using alternate or scheduled services 146
Turning services on or off 146
Designating alternate routes for calls 148
Programming routes 151
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
iv
Programming destination codes 152
Turning a manual service on or off with a feature code
Assigning control extensions 155
Changing the name of a schedule 157
Changing the time of a schedule 157
Passwords
155
159
Password security 160
Setting the SAPLUS password 160
Setting the Administrator password 160
Setting the Basic password 161
Hospitality passwords 162
I-RAD password 163
Call services
Erasing a forgotten Call log password
Programming Call services 166
1st Display 166
Auto called ID 167
165
166
Remote access
169
Programming lines and features for remote access
Auto Attendant
170
175
Auto Attendant 176
System Answer 176
Custom Call Routing (CCR) 176
CCR groups 177
Direct extension dialling 177
Customising System Answer and CCR 178
Turning System Answer on or off 178
Turning CCR on or off 179
Choosing the attendant telephone 179
Setting the number of rings before System Answer answers a call 179
Setting the number of rings before a caller hears the CCR greeting 180
Adding or removing extensions from a CCR group 180
Using the pre-recorded greetings 181
Using customised greetings for System Answer and CCR 182
Recording customised greetings for System Answer and CCR 183
Programming or changing CCR destinations 184
Testing your custom System Answer and CCR 184
Maintenance
187
Beginning a Maintenance session 188
Checking the system version of the software
System Administration Log record 189
Troubleshooting
Recording and reporting alarm codes
Clearing lines 192
Power failure 193
Power-fail telephone 194
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
188
191
192
P0905531 Issue 01
v
SECTION III: Using telephone features 195
About Norstar telephones
197
About Norstar telephones 198
M7324N telephone 198
M7310N telephone 199
M7208N telephone 200
M7100N telephone 200
M7000 telephone 201
Release key 202
Visually Impaired Operator Console 202
Central Answering Position 203
Common feature display messages 204
Customising a Norstar telephone
207
Dialling mode 208
Display contrast 209
Key Inquiry 209
Moving line keys 210
Ring type 210
Ring volume 211
Using personal features
Background music 214
Do Not Disturb 214
Personal Speed Dial codes
Using Speed Dial 215
213
215
Answering calls
217
Answering a call 218
Privacy feature (external calls only) 218
Answering the next queued call 218
Answering hunt group calls 219
Multiple appearances of DIA lines 219
Using Handsfree 219
Answering a telephone using Directed Pickup 221
Answering a telephone using Pickup Group 221
Answer keys 222
Listening in a group 223
Disconnecting accidentally 223
Holding calls
225
Holding 226
Listening on hold 226
Routing calls
229
Call Parking 230
DIA calls 231
Making a Priority call 232
Transferring a call 233
Transferring to a busy extension (Call Camping)
Making external calls
Using an exchange code 236
Using line pools 236
Making a conference call 237
Using Class of Service passwords
P0905531 Issue 01
233
235
240
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
vi
Making internal calls
241
Making an internal call 242
Making a conference call 242
Accessing a Direct-Dial extension
Leaving messages 242
Paging 245
Remote paging 245
Voice call 246
242
Forwarding calls
249
Forwarding all calls 250
External Call forward 250
Line redirection 252
Saving time with features
255
Using System Speed Dial 256
Using Autodial 256
Using Redial 258
Programming memory keys 258
Using Ring Again 260
Using Hotline 260
Using display features
261
Time and Date 262
Static Time 262
Call Duration Timer 262
Call Information 262
Call Log 264
Autobumping 269
Special dialling features
271
Special dialling features 272
Inserting a pause 272
Setting Long tones 272
Programmed Release 273
Recall 273
Run/Stop 273
Wait for Dial Tone 274
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)
ISDN services 276
Digital Network Adapter
275
278
Feature quick reference
279
Compact Plus feature codes 280
ISDN terminal features 283
ATA extension features 284
Appendix A: Programming overviews
287
Index
307
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
SECTION I: System Administration
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
2
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Introduction
• Safety and Regulatory information.........4
• You must be the administrator.........5
• Here’s what you need to start programming.........6
• Understanding the telephone keys.........7
• Starting a programming session.........9
• Ending a programming session.........9
• Using passwords to access programming.........9
• Understanding your system.........10
• Map of Administrator Plus programming.........10
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
4 Introduction
Safety and Regulatory information
Markings
CE Marking
Notified Body Number
Network Connection Mark
APPROVED for connection to
telecommunication systems specified in the
instructions for use subject to the conditions set
out in them.
Approval Numbers: 60/2494 and 97/4902
CE Marking
The CE marking on this equipment indicates compliance with the
following EU Directives:
• Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC)
• EMC Directive (89/336/EEC)
WARNING!
EMC
This is a Class A product intended for an
industrial or commercial environment. In a
domestic environment, this product may cause
interference. The user may be required to take
adequate measures.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Introduction 5
You must be the administrator
If the installer has given this guide to you, you’re most likely the
system administrator.
As an administrator, your role is to
• help your colleagues learn to use their Norstar telephones
• change Norstar programming to customise the system for your
office or to keep up with changes in your office environment
or personnel
• call for help or service when necessary
System Administration Guide contains all the information you
need to become proficient at using and programming the
Compact Plus system.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
6 Introduction
Here’s what you need to start programming
By following instructions on the telephone display and pressing a
few keys, you can change the Compact Plus system to suit the
specific needs of your office. Before you begin programming,
make sure you have these items:
• an M7310N extension and its programming overlay
Heading
Norstar
Programming
Overlay
M7310N
Back
Show
Next
OR
• an M7324N telephone and its programming overlay.
Norstar Programming Overlay M7324N
Heading
Show
Back
Next
Placing the programming overlay
Place the programming overlay on the appropriate memory keys
as shown in the preceding illustrations. Four memory keys have
special functions during a programming session. Once you exit
programming, the keys return to their normal functions. The
programming keys are active or inactive at different stages of
programming. When a key is active, the indicator next to it is lit
with a (» or ¼).
This is what each programming key does:
Heading—shows you the heading for the current level
Back—moves you back one item at the current level
Show—shows you the first setting within the level
Next—moves you one item forward at the current level
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Introduction 7
Understanding the telephone keys
Take a few minutes to study the telephones. Notice that the
M7324N telephone does not have a Shift key or dual memory
keys.
Locate the different items shown in the following illustrations.
M7310N
1 Keypad
2 Display
3 Display keys
8 7
9
4 Memory keys
5
6
7
8
9
(with indicators)
Dual memory keys
(without indicators)
Shift key
Feature key
Hold key
Release key
3
2
6
1
4
5
5
1 Keypad
M7324N
2 Display
8 7
4 Memory keys
(with indicators)
7 Feature key
8 Hold key
Release key
2
6
3 Display keys
33
1
6
4
4
4
8
The following table describes the various items.
1 keypad
Used for dialling numbers when you are making calls and for entering numbers
and letters when you are programming.
2 Display
Shows instructions for using and programming the telephone.
3 Display key
Activates the instruction that appears on the display above the display key.
4 Memory key
Activates a number or feature code stored in the key.
5 Dual memory key
Can store two numbers or feature codes (M7310N only).
6 Shift key
Press the Shift key before a dual memory key to activate the number or feature
code stored in the secondary memory of the dual memory key (M7310N only).
7 Feature key
Allows you to enter a feature code while using or programming the telephone.
8 Hold key
Puts an active call on hold.
9 Release key
Hangs up an active call or ends programming.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
8 Introduction
Entering numbers and letters using the keypad
Use the keys on the telephone keypad to enter numbers and letters
during programming. When you enter programming or use a
feature code, the keys you press often spell a word. For example,
, the
when you press
number keys spell CONFIG. The C is on key number 2, the O is
on key number 6, the N is also on key number 6, and so on.
However, the display shows numbers instead of letters. The word
just provides an easy way to remember the sequence of numbers.
ƒ••¤flfl‹››
Entering names using the keypad
When you want to use a key to spell a name, such as naming a
hunt group during programming, the function of the key changes
according to the number of times you press the key. The
following illustration shows the functions for the keypad key
when entering letters.
‹
Keypad key
press once for the letter D
press twice for the letter E
press three times for the letter F
press four times for the number 3
More about display keys
Use the three display keys below the display on your telephone to
set and select options. Their function depends on the instruction
that appears on the display directly above each key. Some display
instructions that you may see during programming are DOWN, UP,
or OK.
Display keys
Contrast level 2
DOWN
UP
OK
Display text
Instruction for
display key
Display key
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Introduction 9
Starting a programming session
As administrator, the first steps in making any change to the
Compact Plus system are always the same. You must press the
Ä button and then press ¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ to
access Configuration programming.
Ä.
Press ¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ
Jan1 12:00pm
Press
Feature:ºººººººº
ºººººººººººººººº
(CONFIG).
Password:ººººººº
ºººººººººººRETRY
Press ÛÜßÝß (ADMIN).
Press RETRY to re-enter the password if it is
entered incorrectly.
Terminals&Extnsº
ºººººººººººººººº
The display shows the first of the seven
headings available for programming.
ÛÜßÝß (ADMIN) is the password, unless the password has
been changed. Check Programming Record for the most recent password.
Ending a programming session
¨ to end the session.
Possible display
ººººººººººCHANGE
Press
Endofsession
ºººººººººººººººº
After a few seconds, the time and date
reappear on the display.
The system proceeds with any changes you make to
programming as soon as you move away from a setting, either by
using the navigation keys or ¨.
You can see if the changes you have made to telephone
programming have taken effect by pressing the UPDATE display
key. The display shows you how many telephones have not been
updated yet.
Using passwords to access programming
There are three passwords for Administration programming.
• àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS) — The System Administrator
Plus password lets the administrator access all the settings for
Administration programming, plus several installer settings.
• ÛÜßÝß (ADMIN) — The Administrator password
accesses most of the settings for Administration
programming.
• ÛÛàÝÛ (BASIC) — The Basic password accesses a
few settings that can be changed using feature codes.
The Basic password lets you delegate some of the duties of being
an administrator without allowing access to sensitive
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
10 Introduction
programming. It should be given out with care and changed when
necessary (for example, when someone leaves the company).
For information on changing passwords, see "Setting the Basic
password" on page 161. For more information on the settings that
can be changed with the Basic password, see "Using passwords"
on page 22.
Understanding your system
Exchange lines have been set up by your installer to be either
public, private, or part of a line pool.
• A public line is assigned to more than one extension.
• A private line is assigned to only one extension and to the
Prime extension for that line.
• A line can be assigned to one of three line pools. Extensions
are assigned access to line pools and they share the lines in the
pool with other extensions having access to that pool.
The Compact Plus system automatically assigns extension 221 as
the Prime extension for each exchange line. The Prime extension
provides back-up answering for all unanswered calls coming in
on the exchange line.
Map of Administrator Plus programming
The programming map on the following pages shows the
headings, sub-headings, and settings that you can view when you
access the programming menus after pressing
Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG) and entering
the Administrator Plus password àÛàÞ¡à.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Introduction 11
Programming map (Administrator Plus)
Show extn#
Line access
ö Show
Enter extension then
ö Show
Terminals & Extns
ö Show
or
ö Next
to go through a list of
telephones.
ö Next
ö Next
Capabilities
ö Show
ö Next
Lines
Show line
ö Show
Enter line number or
ö Next
Services
ö Show
ö Next
User Prefernces
Sys speed dial
ö Next
Name
Restrictions
ö Next
Passwords
ö Show
ö Next
ö Next
Restrictions
Call Services
ö Show
ö Next
Time & Date
ö Show
ö Show
ö Next
ö Show, Line Pool C
Prime line
Intercom keys
Answer extns
ö Show, Show extn#
ö Show, 221
OLI #
Name
ö Next
to go through a list of
the lines.
Line assignment
ö Show, Show line
Line Pool access
ö Show, Line Pool A
ö Show, Line Pool B
Restrn filters
Line restrns
Remote restrns
ö Show
Fwd no answer
ö Show, Fwd to
Fwd on busy
ö Show, Fwd to
DND on busy
Handsfree
HF on answerback
Pickup grp
Page zone
Paging
D-Dial
Priority call
Hotline
Aux. ringer
Redirect ring
Receive tones
ATA settings
ö Show, ATA ans timer
ATA mode
ATA tones
ATA use
ö Next
System Prgrming
ö Next
Software keys
ö Next
Maintenance
ö Next
Usage Metrics
These
Headings
continue on
next page.
Ringing service
ö Show
ö Next
Restrn service
ö Show
ö Next
Routing service
ö Next
Common settings
ö Show
Ringing groups
Sched:Night
Sched:Evening
Sched:Lunch
Sched:Sched 4
Sched:Sched 5
Sched:Sched 6
Sched:Night
Sched:Evening
Sched:Lunch
Sched:Sched 4
Sched:Sched 5
Sched:Sched 6
ö Show
Routes
Dest codes
Sched:Night
Sched:Evening
Sched:Lunch
Sched:Sched 4
Sched:Sched 5
Sched:Sched 6
Model
Key Prgrming
User speed dial
Call log opt’ns
Dialing opt’ns
Language
Display cntrst
Ring type
Restrn filters
ö Show, Show filter
Extn restrns
Filters
Extn Lock
Allow last no
Allow saved no
Allow recall
Allow redirect
Line/extn rstrn
ö Show, Show line
Auto call info
ö Show, Show line
1stDisplay
Auto called ID
Log space
Control extns
Schedule names
Schedule times
Note:
The ö symbol means Press. For example,
Press Show, Press Next, or Press Heading.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
12 Introduction
Speed dial # (enter #)
ö Show
Speed dial# is displayed
Use prime line
Display digits
(if display digits=N)
Name (Max. 16 characters)
Bypass restr’n
COS pswds
ö Show, Show pwd#
Terminals & Extns
Call Log pswds
ö Show, Show extn#
ö Next
ö Show, Log pswd
Lines
ö Next
Progrming pswds
ö Show
Hunt groups
ö Show
SysAdmin+
Sys admin
Basic
727587
23646
22742
Services
ö Next
ö Next
Sys speed dial
ö Show
Featr settings
ö Next
Passwords
ö Next
ö Show
Direct-dial
ö Show, D-dial1
ö Show, Intrnl #
ö Next
Time & Date
ö Show
Hour
Minutes
Year
Month
Day
ö Next
Auto Attendant
ö Next
System Prgrming
ö Show
ö Next
ö Show
Remote access
ö Next
Software keys
ö Show
Show group
Member extns
Line assignment
Mode
Hunt delay
If busy
Q Timeout
Overflow
Name
ö Show
Sys ID
Password keys
ö Show
System version
Clear lines
Sys admin log
Remote montr
ö Show
Backgrnd music
On hold
Receiver volume
Camp timeout
Park timeout
Park Mode
Trnsfr callbk
Netwk callbk
Held reminder
Remind delay
Confrence tone
Directd pickup
Page tone
Page Timeout
AutoTime&Date
Call log space
Alarm Extn
Extn relocation
AnsExtn
ö Next
Maintenance
ö Next
Usage Metrics
Auto attend
Attd Extn
System Answer
CCR
ö Show, After
CCR lines
CCR Groups
ö Show, Show group
CCR grp 1
Rem access pkgs
ö Show, Show pkg
Rem line access
ö Show, Show line
Note:
The ö symbol means Press. For example,
Press Show, Press Next, or Press Heading.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
SECTION II: System programming
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
14
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
System programming introduction
• Conventions used in this guide.........16
• Programming overview.........16
• Using passwords.........22
• Programmable settings and features.........24
• Making suggestions.........30
• Advice Line.........30
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
16 System programming introduction
Conventions used in this guide
This section describes the programming choices available to
assist you in designing a system that is efficient for your business.
When you see a numbered symbol, Ú, it represents the numbers
on the telephone keypad. A lettered symbol, , represents the
letters on the telephone keypad. ª
represents a telephone
key. Keys shown like this, Ä, are found on the Norstar
telephones. Four keys, Ð, ­, Ò, and
Ô, are labelled on the programming overlay and
represent the temporary use of keys during programming.
A word shown like this, OK, represents the display key directly
below that word on the display of M7310N and M7324N
telephones.
All default settings appear in bold in the procedures. For
example, if the default setting is none, it appears as None.
Programming overview
Use programming to change default settings as required. Default
settings for the PBX template are shown in bold in the
programming map on page 18.
Headings and sub-headings in programming help you to know
where you are.
Programming has the following main headings:
Terminals&Extns
Assign settings to each extension.
Lines
Assign settings to each internal, external, and DIA
line.
Services
Create services such as night ringing, routing, and
restrictions for making external calls.
Sys speed dial
Create Speed Dial codes that can be used by any
extension in the system.
Passwords
View and change passwords for programming and
features.
Time&Date
Set the time and date on the system clock.
System prgming
Change system-wide settings, Auto Attendant, and
custom call routing programming.
Call services
Assign settings for external voice message services.
Software Keys
Upgrade a restricted Feature Cartridge or activate the
Remote Administration feature using key codes.
Maintenance
View diagnostic information about the system.
Usage Metrics
View statistical information about Hunt group calls.
Each main heading has sub-headings within it. For example,
Terminals&Extns has six sub-headings: Line access,
Capabilities, Name, User preferences, Restrictions, and Call
services.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
System programming introduction 17
Using the System Administrator Plus password, you programme
settings for the entire system as well as settings for individual
extensions.
Programming affects system
operation.
Only a qualified installer or sales support
officer should perform start-up, installation,
and maintenance programming. Some of the
settings affect the correct operation of the
system.
The first three steps of each procedure are provided to get to
Terminals&Extns on the telephone display and can be used to
programme any individual item at any time. However, when you
are programming the whole system, once you have completed the
first programming item, it is not necessary to start at step 1 of the
next procedure unless you leave programming. Just press
Ô to move to the next item in the programming
sequence.
While you are programming the system, the display occasionally
shows Update. You can press the display key below the word to
see what programming changes the system is undergoing.
Any procedure that specifies using the Administrator (ADMIN)
password can also be accessed using the System Administrator
Plus (SAPLUS) password.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
18 System programming introduction
Programming Map
Startup
Template: PBX, Square, Hybrid
Start Extension: 221
Terminals & Extns
Show extn#:_
Line access
Line assignment
Show line:_
(Non-DIA line)
L001: Ring only, Appr&Ring, Appr only, Unassigned
(DIA line)
L101: Ring only, Appr&Ring, Appr only, Unassigned
Appearances:1
LinePool access
Line Pool A: Y, Line Pool B: N, Line Pool C: Y
Prime line: None, PoolA, Pool C, Intcm
Intercom keys: 2 (0 to 8)
Answer extns
Show extn#:_
221: Unassigned, Appr&Ring, Appr only
OLI #: Extn #
Capabilities
Fwd no answer
Fwd to: None
Forward delay: 2, 3, 4, 6, 10
Fwd on busy
Fwd to: None
DND on busy: 221: N, Others: Y
Handsfree: None, Auto, Std
HF answerback: Y
Pickup grp: None, 1, 2, 3, 4
Page zone: None, 1, 2, 3
Paging: Y
D-Dial: None, Extn1
Priority call: N
Hotline: None, Intrnl, Extrnl
(if Extrnl) Use prime line, Use line, Pool code, Use routing tabl
Aux. ringer: N
Redirect ring: Y
Receive tones: N
ATA settings
ATA ans timer: 3, 5, 7, 10
(If DN is the I-ATA) Use ringback
ATA mode: Tone, Pulse
ATA tones: N
ATA use: On site, Off site
Name: 221
User prefernces
Model: M7208, M7310, M7324, M7100
Key prgrming
(If M7000) 1 key
(If M7100N) 1 key
(If M7208N) 8 keys
(If M7310N) 10 +24 keys
(If M7324N) 24 keys
User speed dial
Call log opt’ns: No one answered, Unanswerd by me, Log all calls,
No auto logging
Dialling opt’ns: Automatic dial, Predial, Standard dial
Language: English, Opratng
Display cntrst: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
Ring type: 1, 2, 3, 4
Restrictions (extns)
Restrn filters (00-99)
Show filter:_
Restrn flt: 00
No restrictions
Restrn flt 01:
Restrn 01:
Deny: 0
Override 001: 0800
Restrn 02:
Deny: 1
Override 001: No overrides
Restrn flt: 05
Restrn 01: 010
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Deny: 010
No overrides
Restrn 02: 1
Deny: 1
No overrides
Restrn 03: 00
Deny: 00
No overrides
Restrn flt: 06
Restrn 01: <ANY>
Deny: <ANY>
No overrides
Extn restrns
Filters
Normal: 02
Night: 11
Evening: 12
Lunch: 13
Sched 4: 00
Sched 5: 00
Sched 6: 00
Extn lock: None, Partial, Full
Allow last no: Y
Allow saved no: Y
Allow link: Y
Allow redirect: N
Line/extn rstrns
Show line:_
Normal: None
Night: None
Evening: None
Lunch: None
Sched 4: None
Sched 5: None
Sched 6: None
Call Services
Auto call info
Show line:_
Caller ID set: N (Default for DIA: Y)
Call log set: N (Default for DIA: Y)
1stDisplay: Numbr, Line
Auto called ID:N
Log space
Log 0 Pool 250
Lines
Show line:
Line data
(BRI lines) 1-8, 31-38
TrunkType: BRI
Line type: PoolA, PoolB, PoolC, Public, Private to:
PrimeExtn: 221
Auto privacy: Y
Ans mode: Auto, Manual (if Ans mode: Auto) Ans with DISA: N
Aux. ringer: N
Full AutoHold: N
(Exchange lines) 1-4, 31-34 analogue
Line type: PoolA, PoolB, PoolC, Public, Private to:
Dial mode: Tone, Pulse
Prime extn: 221
Auto privacy: Y
Mode: EarthCallng, LoopGuarded, LoopUnguard
(if Mode: LoopUnguard) Recall: Timed brk, Earth500, Earth1000,
Earth1500
Aux. ringer: N
Recall time: Time Brk
Recall at EXCH: N
Dial Tone: Detect, Delay
(if Mode: Earth Calling or loop unguarded) Ans mode: Auto, Manual
(if Ans mode: Auto) Ans with DISA: N
Full AutoHold: N
(AC15A private circuits) 61-62
TrunkType: AC15
Line type: PoolA, PoolB, PoolC, Public, Private to:
Dial mode: Tone, Pulse
PrimeExtn: 221
Auto privacy: Y
Ans mode: Auto, Manual (if Ans mode: Auto) Ans with DISA: N
Amplified AC15: Y
Vol. setting: 1, 2, 3
P0905531 Issue 01
System programming introduction 19
Aux. ringer: N
Recall at EXCH: N
Full AutoHold: N
(Direct Inward Access lines) 101-140
DIA line
Line type:Public, Private to:
Received numbrs
Private#: (defaults to extn #) (1 to 7 digits)
Public#: (defaults to extn #) (1 to 7 digits)
If busy: BusyTone, To prime
PrimeExtn: 221
Aux. ringer: N
Name: Line001
Restrictions (lines)
Restrn filters (00-99)
Show filter:_
Restrn flt 00
No restrictions
Restrn flt 01
Restrn 01:
Deny: 0
Override 001:0800
Restrn 02:
Deny: 1
Override 001: No overrides
Restrn flt: 05
Restrn 01:
Deny: 010
Override 001: No overrides
Restrn 02:
Deny: 1
Override 001: No overrides
Restrn 03:
Deny: 00
Override 001: No overrides
Restrn flt: 06
Restrn 01:
Deny: <ANY>
Override 001: No overrides
Line restrns
Normal: 03
Night: 21
Evening: 22
Lunch: 23
Sched 4: 00
Sched 5: 00
Sched 6: 00
Remote restrns
Normal: 04
Night: 31
Evening: 32
Lunch: 33
Sched 4: 00
Sched 5: 00
Sched 6: 00
Services
Ringing service
Ringing groups (01-20)
Show group:_
Ring grp: 01
Show extension:_
221: Assigned, all others: Unassign
Sched:Night
Service: Manual, Auto, Off
Trunk answer: Y
ExtraDial: 221
Line settings
Show line:_
Ring grp: 0 (0 to 20)
Aux. ringer: Y
Sched: Evening
Sched: Lunch
Sched: Sched 4
Sched: Sched 5
Sched: Sched 6
P0905531 Issue 01
Restrn service
Sched: Night
Service: Manual, Auto, Off
Sched: Evening
Sched: Lunch
Sched: Sched 4
Sched: Sched 5
Sched: Sched 6
Routing service
Routes (000-200)
Show route:_
DialOut: No numbr (Max.24 digits)
Use: Pool A, Pool B, PoolC
Dest codes
Show DstCode:_
Normal: 000
AbsorbLength: All
Night: None
Evening: None
Lunch: None
Sched 4: None
Sched 5: None
Sched 6: None
Sched: Night
Service: Manual, Auto, Off
Overflow: N
Sched: Evening
Sched: Lunch
Sched: Sched 4
Sched: Sched 5
Sched: Sched 6
Common settings
Control extns
For lines
Show line:_
L001: 221
For extns
Show extn#:_
221: 221
Schedule names
Sched 1: Night
Sched 2: Evening
Sched 3: Lunch
Sched 4: Sched 4
Sched 5: Sched 5
Sched 6: Sched 6
Schedule times
Monday
Sched: Night
Start time: 23:00
Stop time: 07:00
Sched:Evening
Sched: Lunch
Sched: Sched 4
Sched: Sched 5
Sched: Sched 6
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
Sys speed dial
Speed dial #: (Max. 24 digits)
Use prime line, Use line, Pool code, Use routing tabl
Display digits: Y
(if Display digits=N) Name: Max. 16 characters
Bypass restr'n: N
Passwords
COS pswds
Show pswd #:_ (00-99)
COS pswd # 00
Pswd 00: None
User flt: None (00 to 99)
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
20 System programming introduction
Line flt: None (00 to 99)
Remote pkg: None (00 to 15)
Call log pswds
Show extn#:_
Log pswd: None
Progrming pswds
Installer: 266344 (CONFIG)
SysAdmin+: 727587 (SAPLUS)
Sys admin: 23646 (ADMIN)
Basic: 22742 (BASIC)
IRAD pswd: SysID (displayed after initial setting is done through RACE)
Hospitality
Desk pswd: 4677
(HOSP)
Cond: None
Time&Date
Hour: 01
Minutes: 00
Year: 99
Month: 01
Day: 01
System prgrming
Hunt Groups
Show grp:_
HGn:<DN>
Members
01:<extn>...
Appr only, Appr&Ring, Ring only
Line assignment
Show line:_
Lnnn: Unassigned, Assigned
Mode: Sequential, Cyclic, Broadcast
Hunt delay: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
If busy: busyTone, overflow, queue
Q Timeout: 15, 30, 45, 60, 120, 180
Overflow: <extn>
Name: HGn,_<7 characters>
Change extns
Old extn:_ (Max. 7 digits)
NEW extn:_ (Max. 7 digits)
Featr settings
Backgrnd music: N
On hold: Tones, Music, Silence
Receiver volume: Use sys volume, Use extn volume
Camp timeout: 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180
Park timeout: 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180, 300, 600
Park Mode: Lowest, Cycle
Trnsfr callbk: 3, 4, 5, 6, 12
Network callbk: 15, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120
DRT to prime: Y
DRT delay: 1, 2, 3, 4, 6
EX-EX Trf/Conf: Y
Held reminder: Y
Remind delay: 30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180
Confrence tone: Y
Directd pickup: Y
Page tone: Y
PageTimeout: 15, 30, 60, 120, 180, 300, 600, 2700
AutoTime&Date: Y
Call log space
Reset all logs?
Host delay: 1000 (1000 to 7000 in 500 ms increments)
AlarmExtn: 221
Extn relocation: N
Exch ring: Preset, Echo
PCct delay: 200, 800, 1600
Ans.Extn: Basic, Enhanced, extended
Direct-dial
D-Dial 1: Intrnl, Extrnl, None
Intrnl#: 221, Extrnl#: None
CAP assignment
CAP1: None
Access codes
Line pool codes
Line pool A: 9, Line pool B & C: None
Park prefix: 1
Exch code: 9
Direct-Dial: 0
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Auto #: None
DISA #: None
Auto Attendant
Auto attend: Off, On
Attd extn: 221
System Answer
After: 3 rings (2 to 12)
CCR
After: 3 rings (2 to 12)
CCR lines
L001: Answer: No, Yes
CCR groups
Show group:_
CCR grp 1
Show DN:_
221: Unassgnd, Assigned
Remote access
Rem access pkgs (00 to 15)
Show pkg:_
LinePool access
Pool A: (9) N
Remote page: N
Remote admin: N
Remote monitor: N
Rem line access
Show line:_
L001: Rem pkg: 00
IRAD
Answer line: None
After: 5 ring (1 to 12)
Rec’d # lengths
Private length: 3 (1-7)
Public length: 3 (1-7)
Extn # length: 3
Intrl modem: Fast, Slow
Alarm reporting
Auto-report: Off, On
Phone #1: None
Phone #2: None
Use line: None
Retry time: 15
Num. retries: 5 (0 to 9)
Hospitality
Room / desk info
Show extn:__
Room #:_
Adm pwd req’d: Y
Call restrns
Vacant: 00
Use fit:
Basic: 00
Mid: 00
Full: 00
Service time
Hour: 00
Minutes: 00
Alarm
Attn attempts: 3
Retry intrvl: 4
Attn duration: 15
Time format: 12hr, 24hr
Expired Alarms
Notify extn: None
Use tone: N
Software Keys
SysID (8 digits)
Password keys
Key 1 (8 digits)
Key 2 (8 digits)
Key 3 (8 digits)
Hardware
Cd1 - CCU: BRI-4, BRI-2, Loop
Cd2 - CCU: BRI-4, BRI-2, Loop
(if BRI card)
Loops: (Cd1 loops 201-204), (Cd2 loops 231-234)
Type: S, T
(If Type T) press ¦ to view Lines on loop
(If Type T) Protocol: EURO, BTNR191
P0905531 Issue 01
System programming introduction 21
(If Type S) Sampling: Adaptve, Fixed
Extns on Loop
Assign Extns (273-304)
Show extn#:_
304: Availabl
Loop extn#: None
Cd2 - CCU: Loop
Maintenance
System version
Clear lines
Port/Extn status
Module status
Sys test log
Sys admin log
Provisioning
Tests
Remote montr: Off, On
Diagnostic tools *
Usage Metrics
Hunt groups
Show group:_
HG <n> metrics
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
22 System programming introduction
Using passwords
Programming access is controlled by four passwords.
• Installer password—allows you to see and change any item in
programming.
• System Administrator Plus password—provides
knowledgeable users with access to all but a few sensitive
areas of programming.
• Administrator password—used to view and change the
settings that are part of day-to-day administration of the
Norstar system.
• Basic password—only used with a limited number of feature
codes to change programming and control system services.
The following tables show the items that can be programmed
when using the System Administrator Plus password or the
Administrator password. The IRAD password will appear only if
BT has authorised its use after making a remote access (RACE)
connection and changing the default IRAD password.
Programming using the SAPLUS password
Terminals&Extns
Line access
Capabilities
Name
User Prefernces
Restrictions
Call Services
Lines
Name
Restrictions
Services
Ringing service
Restrn service
Routing service
Common settings
Sys speed dial
Passwords
COS pswds
Call Log pswds
Progrming pswds
Time&Date
System prgrming
Hunt groups
Featr settings
Direct-dial
Auto Attendant
Remote access
Software Keys
SysID
Password keys
Maintenance
System version
Clear lines
Sys admin log
Remote montr
Usage Metrics\
Programming using the Administrator password
Terminals&Extns
Capabilities
Name
User Prefernces
Restrictions (Extn only)
Call Services
Lines
Name
Services
Ringing service
Restrn service
Routing service
Sys speed dial
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Passwords
Call Log pswds
Progrming pswds
Time&Date
System prgrming
Auto Attendant
P0905531 Issue 01
System programming introduction 23
Entering programming using the SAPLUS password
The staff person who is in charge of making changes to the
Compact Plus system is called the system administrator.
The System Administrator Plus password lets the administrator
access all the settings for Administration programming, plus a
few installer settings that may have to be changed infrequently.
All procedures in this guide indicate whether you need to use the
System Administrator Plus or the Administrator password.
The default System Administrator Plus password is
àÛàÞ¡à, which spells SAPLUS on the keypad.
1. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG).
The display shows Password :.
2. Enter àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns. Three triangular indicators ¼ appear on
the vertical display between the rows of keys.
3. Place the programming overlay over the keys pointed to by
the indicators ¼.
Entering programming using the Administrator password
The Administrator password is your key to Administration
programming. Most of the programming in this guide can be
entered with the Administrator password.
The default Administrator password is ÛÜßÝß, which
spells ADMIN on the telephone keypad.
Entering programming using the Basic password
The Basic password allows you to do day-to-day maintenance of
individual telephones without allowing access to sensitive
programming.
The default Basic password is ÛÛàÝÛ, which spells
BASIC on the telephone keypad.
You do not enter Basic programming using ÛßßÜÝÝ
(CONFIG). Instead, you enter the Feature code that you want to
program, followed by ÛÛàÝÛ (BASIC). For example:
1. Press Ä¥¥, followed by the code.
2. Enter ÛÛàÝÛ (BASIC).
3. Follow the instructions on the display and make your
selections using the display keys.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
24 System programming introduction
The following feature codes can be accessed using the Basic
password:
• Ä¥¥¡àÜà (USER)—User preferences
settings allow you to programme telephone model, key
assignment, User speed dial, Call log options, Dialling
options, Language, Display contrast, and Ring type.
• Ä¥¥¡ÝßÜ (TIME)—Time and Date
settings let you change any of the settings for hour, minutes,
seconds, year, month, and day.
Programmable settings and features
Compact Plus has several features for ensuring that calls do not
go unanswered or do not get lost. For example, extensions can be
programmed to provide back-up answering for other extensions
or lines. You can also create an attendant position to provide
answering for a group of extensions.
You can forward calls that are unanswered, pick up calls for other
extensions, redirect selected lines to telephones inside or outside
your business, and have calls answered from any extension
during non-business or off-peak hours.
Many call capture features are pre-configured with your Compact
Plus system. Others, however, must be programmed in order to
take full advantage of their flexibility. The following
programming settings are used to enhance answering and
handling calls:.
Do Not Disturb (DND) on busy
Answer extension
Forward on Busy
Call Forward all calls
Forward No Answer
Call Pickup Directed
Hunt groups
Call Pickup Group
Pickup Group
Callback
Prime extension
Call Queuing
Prime line
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Redirect Ring
Line redirection
Trunk Answer
Transfer
Do Not Disturb (DND) on Busy
When this setting is turned on, you do not hear any ringing if a
second call arrives while you are talking on the telephone. If you
want to know when a second call arrives, turn this setting off.
For example, Mr. Forbes dislikes having his telephone ring when
he is on a call. Therefore, he uses the DND on Busy feature so that
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
System programming introduction 25
additional calls are diverted to the Prime extension until he has
finished his current call. If your telephone is a Prime extension
for any line, do not use the DND on Busy feature.
If an extension is a member of a hunt group and the extension
activates this feature, the extension will not receive notification
of incoming hunt group calls while on a call.
See "Programming Do Not Disturb on Busy" on page 94.
Forward on Busy
When you already have a call, ensure that other calls to your
extension are answered. Forward the additional calls to an
extension that you know will be monitored.
For example, Miss Vale works with Mr. Cassidy as a team. They
answer each other’s calls. Forward on Busy is set for the teammate’s extension. When Mr. Cassidy is busy on a call, other calls
to his extension are forwarded immediately to Miss Vale.
If your extension is a member of a hunt group, the Call Forward
on Busy setting is overridden by the hunt group routing.
See "Setting Call Forward no answer" on page 92.
Forward No Answer
When you are away from your telephone, ensure that calls are
answered by forwarding to an extension that you know will be
monitored.
For example, Miss Vale works with Mr. Cassidy as a team. They
make sure that one of them is always in the office. Forward No
Answer is set for the team-mate’s extension. When Miss Vale is
away from her telephone, calls are forwarded immediately to Mr.
Cassidy.
If your extension is a member of a hunt group, the Call Forward
No Answer setting is overridden by the hunt group routing.
See "Setting Call Forward no answer" on page 92.
Hunt groups
Establish hunt groups in your system to allow external and
internal callers to reach a group of extensions by calling a single
directory number. The hunt groups feature ensures calls are easily
routed to the appropriate people. You can programme the
members for a group, member position within a group, how calls
are distributed, how long is spent looking for available agents and
what happens if all agents are busy.
For example, your company has five sales people available to
field calls from clients. Bob is your most experienced sales
person and you would like him to receive incoming calls first.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
26 System programming introduction
You would set up a Hunt Group with these five extensions as
members, programme Bob’s extension as the first member in the
group, set the distribution mode to sequential so Bob receives
incoming calls first, and name this group SALES.
See "Programming Hunt groups" on page 111.
Pickup group
Assign extensions to one of nine Pickup groups for maximum call
coverage. This ensures that extensions in a group can answer calls
for any other extension in that group.
For example, Mr. Forbes and Ms. Smith both belong to Pickup
group 3. When Mr. Forbes is away from his extension, Ms. Smith
presses ÄàÞ on her own extension to answer Mr.
Forbes’ calls.
A hunt group call ringing at an extension that is a member of a
hunt group can be picked up by any extension in that Call Pickup
Group.
See "Assigning a Pickup group" on page 97.
Prime extension
The Compact Plus system automatically assigns extension 221 as
the Prime extension for each exchange line. Your system installer
can change the extension number in Lines programming. The
Prime extension can be programmed to receive unanswered calls
through Delayed Ring Transfer, Held Line Reminders and Do
Not Disturb transfers.
In a busy office, the receptionist or secretary extension may be
designated as the Prime extension.
Prime line for an extension
A line can be assigned to a telephone as its primary line to use
when making an outgoing call. This feature saves the user time
because the system automatically selects the line rather than the
user having to select the line.
See "Assigning a Prime line to an extension" on page 34.
Redirect ring
When this feature is turned on, the telephone gives an audible
signal whenever a call has been redirected. This reminds you that
a line has been redirected using the Line redirection feature and
serves as a cue to turn the feature off.
For example, you have re-directed line 1 to another extension in
the network. If Redirect ring is on, you hear a short ring every
time a call on line 1 is forwarded to the other telephone.
See "Activating Redirect ring" on page 101.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
System programming introduction 27
Trunk answer
This feature is active by default for all Service modes. This means
that during non-business or non-busy times, any extension can
answer calls ringing at any other extension. It does not matter
which lines appear on the extensions. It only matters that the line
itself has been placed in a Service mode using its Control
extension.
For example, during the lunch break between 11:30 a.m. and 1:00
p.m., lines 1, 2, and 3 are put in Lunch mode. Trunk answer is
active, so whenever any extension rings, Mr. Cassidy, who acts as
a temporary attendant, can answer from his extension.
See "Using alternate or scheduled services" on page 146.
Answer extension
If your telephone has an Answer key for someone else’s
extension, you can answer that other person’s calls on your
telephone.
For example, Mr. Cassidy’s telephone has an Answer key for
Miss Vale. When Miss Vale’s telephone rings, Mr. Cassidy can
answer it on his telephone by pressing the Answer key. Miss Vale
has been assigned as an Answer extension on Mr. Cassidy’s
telephone.
Simply press the Answer key when you hear the other person’s
telephone ringing.
See "Answer keys" on page 222.
Call Forward all calls
If you know you are going to be away from your telephone for a
while, forward your calls to another extension. Otherwise the
callers must wait for the Forward No Answer feature to
automatically transfer the call after several rings.
For example, Mr. Forbes knows that most client calls arrive in the
morning, but he will be in meetings until noon. He forwards his
extension to Ms. Smith, who can deal with issues right away.
Press ÄÝ, then the extension number that you wish to
send the calls to.
If your extension is a member of a hunt group, the Call Forward
all calls setting is overridden by the hunt group routing.
See "Forwarding all calls" on page 250.
Call Pickup Directed
If any telephone is ringing in your office, you can answer it from
your extension.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
28 System programming introduction
For example, only a few people are in the office early in the
morning. When Miss Vale’s telephone rings, Mr. Forbes takes the
call using Call Pickup Directed.
Press Äàß, then dial the extension of the telephone
that is ringing.
See "Answering a telephone using Pickup Group" on page 221.
Call Pickup Group
If your telephone is part of a Pickup Group, you can answer calls
ringing on any telephone in the same group.
For example, Mr. Forbes and Ms. Smith both belong to Pickup
Group 3. When Mr. Forbes is away from his telephone, Ms. Smith
uses the Call Pickup Group feature on her own extension to
answer Mr. Forbes’ calls.
Press ÄàÞ.
See "Answering a telephone using Pickup Group" on page 221.
Call Queuing
When more than one call is ringing at your telephone, you can
ensure you answer the calls in the order they arrive.
For example, Mr. Cassidy notices that he has calls on Line 3 and
on line 4. He does not know which call arrived first, so he uses
Call Queuing to answer.
Press Ä¡âÚ.
See "Answering the next queued call" on page 218.
Do Not Disturb
If you do not want to be interrupted by any telephone calls, turn
on the Do Not Disturb feature so that calls are immediately
transferred to the Prime extension.
For example, Mr. Moore is having a performance review meeting
with the president of the company. Mr. Moore turns on Do Not
Disturb before the meeting so that all calls are routed to the
attendant.
Press Ä¡Þ.
A hunt group extension can temporarily leave the hunt group by
activating this feature.
See "Do Not Disturb" on page 214.
Line redirection
You can use the Line redirection feature to redirect the calls
coming in on your external lines to a telephone outside the office.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
System programming introduction 29
You can redirect exchange lines to AC15A private circuits, and
you can redirect AC15A private circuits to either exchange lines
or private circuits, and you can redirect one exchange line to
another.
You may choose to redirect all your external lines or only some
of them. For example, you generally receive personal calls on
Line 1 and customer calls on Line 2. You can redirect Line 2 to a
colleague when you are busy, but still accept personal calls on
line 1.
Press Ä¡Ý, then follow the prompts on your display.
See "Line redirection" on page 252.
Ring Again
You can have the Norstar system notify you when an extension is
either not busy or has just been used. This feature enables you to
reach the person on that extension.
For example, Miss Vale has an urgent request for Mr. Moore.
When she dials his extension, it is busy. She uses the Ring Again
feature to monitor the line. As soon as Mr. Moore hangs up, Miss
Vale’s telephone rings to let her know that she can try her call
again.
Dial the extension number, press ÄÛ, then hang up.
See "Using Ring Again" on page 260.
Transfer
If you are an attendant, or if a call should be routed to someone
else, you can do it easily with Compact Plus. For example, a
client calls Mr. Forbes. Mr. Forbes realises that it would be better
for the client to speak to Ms. Smith, so he transfers the call to Ms.
Smith’s extension. When Ms. Smith answers, Mr. Forbes
explains the situation briefly and then hangs up. The client
remains on the line with Ms. Smith.
Press Äàâ, dial the number, then hang up.
See "Transferring a call" on page 233.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
30 System programming introduction
Making suggestions
Please submit your comments and suggestions to
British Telecommunications
Norstar Product Manager
Weston House
246 High Holborn
London
WC1V 7DQ
U.K.
Advice Line
If you have difficulty programming or using a system feature,
refer to the description of the feature, and follow the appropriate
procedures. If you still have difficulty, call the Advice Line at
0800 378822.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Programming Terminals and Extensions
• Terminals and extensions.........32
• Assigning a line to an extension (line access).........32
• Assigning line pool access.........34
• Assigning a Prime line to an extension.........34
• Assigning intercom keys to an extension.........35
• Assigning an Answer key to an extension.........36
• Setting the Originating Line Identification for an extension.........37
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
32 Programming Terminals and Extensions
Terminals and extensions
Terminals&Extns lets you assign settings to each telephone.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. PressÄ¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ­. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn (nnn represents the
three-digit extension number).
Assigning a line to an extension (line access)
Line access allows you to assign lines to individual extensions.
When you are finished programming line access settings for one
extension, you can copy those settings to other extensions by
using COPY at the Line Access display. For more information
about copying extension programming, see "Copying
programming for telephones" on page 135.
Line Assignment
This setting allows you to assign physical lines and Direct Inward
Access (DIA) lines to each extension. DIA lines are assigned and
removed in the same manner as other lines.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. PressÄ¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ­. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ­ three times. The display shows Show line:.
7. Enter the line number. The display shows Lnnn:Unassigned.
8. Press SCAN to see the setting and then press SCAN again to
view the lines assigned to this extension.
9. Press CHANGE to change the setting for each line:
Appr&Ring, Appr only, Unassigned, or Ring only.
10. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Programming Terminals and Extensions 33
In general, exchange lines are not assigned to telephones. If
assigned, they are used for monitoring incoming call usage or for
making outgoing calls.
You cannot assign a line that is private to another telephone.
Each line assigned to appear at a telephone must appear at a key
with an indicator on that extension.
If you set a line to Ring only, incoming calls appear on an
intercom key.
A Central Answering Position (CAPN) module can provide extra
line keys.
The M7100N telephone is an exception. It has no line keys and
can be assigned any number of lines. Make sure that lines
assigned to an M7100N telephone are assigned to ring; otherwise,
you cannot detect incoming calls on the lines.
Number of appearances
This setting allows you to assign the number of appearances of a
DIA line (lines 101 to 140) allowed on an extension. In order to
programme the number of appearances, the line assignment value
must not be Unassigned. The default setting is 1.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. PressÄ¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ­. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ­ three times. The display shows Show line:.
7. Press Ô. The display shows Lnnn: and the line’s
assignment.
8. Press ­. The display shows Appearances:1. This
prompt does not appear if the line is unassigned.
9. Press CHANGE and enter a numeric value from 1 to 255.
10. Press OK.
11. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
34 Programming Terminals and Extensions
Assigning line pool access
Line pools allows the system to share lines among a number of
telephones, reducing line costs and the number of button
appearances on the telephones in the system.
This setting allows an extension to access one or more of the three
line pools available (A, B, or C). When you change the setting to
Yes for a line pool, the extension being programmed can access
any line in that line pool.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. PressÄ¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ­. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ­ twice. The display shows Line
assignment.
7. Press Ô. The display shows LinePool access.
8. Press ­.
9. Press CHANGE to select the setting: N (No) or Y (Yes).
10. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Assigning a Prime line to an extension
This setting assigns a Prime line to the telephone. When the
telephone is being used to make an outgoing call, the Prime line
is the first line the system selects.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. PressÄ¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ­. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ­ twice. The display shows Line
assignment.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Programming Terminals and Extensions 35
7. Press Ô until the display shows Prime line:.
8. Press CHANGE to select the setting: None, Pool A, or Intcm
(intercom). Only assigned lines and line pools appear.
9. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
An assigned Prime line is not associated with the assignment of a
Prime extension.
An exchange line must be assigned to the extension in Line
assignment before it can be assigned as the Prime line to the
extension.
A line pool must be assigned to the extension in line pool access
before a line pool can be assigned as the Prime line to the
extension.
By assigning a line pool as a Prime line, an extension can be made
to search automatically for an idle line in a pool.
Note: If you set Prime line to Intcm (intercom), you can still
access any line pools you have assigned to the extension.
When you enter the line pool access code, the system
searches for an idle line in that pool. When all the lines in
the pool are busy, the display shows No free lines. The
system does not search from one pool to another.
Assigning intercom keys to an extension
Intercom keys can provide an extension with access to internal
lines and line pools.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ­. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ­ twice. The display shows Line
assignment.
7. Press Ô until the display shows Intercom keys:.
8. Press CHANGE to select the setting: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8.
9. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
36 Programming Terminals and Extensions
Each intercom key assigned during programming automatically
appears on the extension. The keys start with the lower right-hand
key, or one key above if the Handsfree/Mute feature is assigned
to the extension.
An extension needs two intercom keys to establish a conference
call with two other Norstar extensions.
Only one intercom key may be required if the key is only to be
used to access line pools and to make and receive internal calls.
If an extension has several lines assigned only to ring and not
appear, the arrangement works better if there are two intercom
keys.
The M7100N telephone default assignment of two intercom keys
cannot be changed. These keys do not appear on the telephone.
Assigning an Answer key to an extension
Calls for other Norstar telephones can appear and be answered at
the extension being programmed. The extension numbers of the
other telephones are referred to as Answer extension numbers.
You can assign up to eight Answer extension numbers to the
telephone being programmed.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. PressÄ¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ­. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ­ twice. The display shows Line
assignment.
7. Press Ô until the display shows Answer extns.
8. Press ­. The display shows Show extn#:.
9. Enter the extension number.
10. Press CHANGE to change the setting for the Answer extension
number: Appr&Ring, Appr only, or Unassigned.
11. To assign additional Answer extension numbers, press
Ð, ­, then enter the next Answer
extension number.
12. Press SCAN to view the Answer extension numbers assigned
to this extension.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Programming Terminals and Extensions 37
13. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Every Answer extension number assigned to the telephone
automatically assigns an Answer key with an indicator to the
telephone. These keys should be labelled accordingly, identifying
the telephone with its name or extension number.
More than one telephone can have an Answer key for the same
extension number. In this way, more than one telephone can
provide Call Alerting and Call Answering for any calls directed
to that extension number.
A private line does not generate alerting at an Answer key.
Note: You cannot assign Answer extension numbers to an
M7100N telephone or to a single-line telephone connected
to an Analogue Terminal Adapter.
See "Answer keys" on page 222 for information on using Answer
keys.
Setting the Originating Line Identification for an extension
Outgoing calls on a Direct Dial Inward (DDI) line use an
Originating Line Identification (OLI) number, which appears on
the telephone display of the called party as part of the calling line
identification (CLID). Compact Plus allows you to programme
the OLI number for each extension. The OLI number could be the
Public Received number for the DDI line assigned to the
extensions, or it could be a different Public Received number if
you wish calls to be returned to someone else’s extension. Ensure
that the OLI numbers are in the same range as the received digits
that come from the exchange.
For example, a sales manager who uses a DDI line to call clients
may wish to have returned calls directed to an assistant. The OLI
programmed for the manager’s extension is the Public Received
number for the assistant’s extension. Thus, a client viewing the
CLID number on their telephone display sees the assistant’s
telephone number.
If the OLI number is set to None, then the CLID displayed at the
called party’s telephone is a listed extension number for your
Compact Plus system. If the programmed OLI number is outside
the allowed range, Compact Plus may insert a default number.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. PressÄ¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
38 Programming Terminals and Extensions
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ­. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ­ twice. The display shows Line
assignment.
7. Press Ô until the display shows OLI #:.
8. Press CHANGE and enter the number.
9. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Programming Hospitality Services
• Common extension.........40
• Room extension.........40
• Hospitality Services admin telephone.........40
• Alarm time (AL) feature.........40
• Hospitality Services admin alarm feature.........42
• Room occupancy (RO).........43
• Room condition (RC).........44
• Service time.........46
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
40 Programming Hospitality Services
Hospitality Services (HS) is a group of features that increases the
value of the Compact Plus system in small to medium sized
hotels, motels or hospitals.
In a hotel setting, guests gain improved services through
immediate access to basic functions like:
• wake-up service or reminders
• accurate tracking of the room’s service requirements (for
example check-in/check-out).
Hospitality Services features must be activated by qualified
personnel using Software keycodes. See "Software Keys" on
page 54.
Norstar telephones are classified as one of following types of
telephones: a common extension, a room extension or a HS
admin telephone.
Common extension
A common extension can be a telephone found in a lobby, office,
or common area; it is not associated with a room. A common
extension does not have access to all HS features.
Common extensions are Norstar telephones or analogue
telephones connected to an analogue terminal adapter (ATA).
Room extension
A Room extension is a telephone assigned to a room in System
programming. Up to five telephones can be assigned to the same
room (they all share the same room number).
Room extension can be any Norstar telephone or analogue
telephone connected to an ATA.
Hospitality Services admin telephone
A HS admin telephone is any two-line display Norstar telephone.
A HS admin telephone can be programmed to require a user to
enter the Desk admin password before access to HS admin
features is granted. To change the Desk admin password see
"Hospitality passwords" on page 162.
Alarm time (AL) feature
The Alarm time feature provides an alarm clock capability on
Norstar telephones and analogue telephones connected to an
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Programming Hospitality Services 41
ATA. Both room extensions and common extensions can be
programmed to sound an audible alert at a requested time.
One Alarm time within a 24 hour period is programmable on a
room or common extension and must be reset daily. When the
alarm sounds, all telephones in a given room alert. Cancelling the
alarm on any telephone cancels the alarm on all the telephones in
the room. A new Alarm time entered on a room or common
extension overwrites any alarm set previously.
If the Compact Plus system experiences a mains failure, the
failure can result in missed Alarm times. When the Compact Plus
system is running and the system’s time resets, the missed Alarm
times alert on respective room or common extensions. At all
times, the Compact Plus system allows up to a maximum of 24
extensions that can alert at the same time.
Programming the Alarm time feature
To programme the Alarm time feature on a Norstar telephone:
1. Press Ä¡àÞ. The display shows Alrm:
07:00am OFF.
2. If the alarm time is correct press ON/OFF. The display shows
Alrm:07:00am ON. Press DONE to exit.
or
To enter a new alarm time press CHG. The display shows
Enter time:.
3. Enter a new 4 digit alarm time.
— If the 24 hour clock format is used (hour: 00 to 23 and
minutes: 00 to 59), no confirmation is required. The
display shows Alarm ON hh:mm.
— If the 12 hour format is used, the display shows hh:mm AM
or PM?. Press the AM or PM display key. The display shows
Alarm ON hh:mm.
To programme the Alarm time feature on an M7000 telephone or
analogue telephone:
1. Press ²¡àÞ on an M7000 telephone or
press À¥¡àÞ on an analogue telephone.
A tone sounds.
2. Enter a 4 digit alarm time.
— If the 24 hour clock format is used (hour: 00 to 23 and
minutes: 00 to 59), a tone sounds.
— If the 12 hour format is used, press ¥ to select am or £
to select pm. A tone sounds.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
42 Programming Hospitality Services
At the selected times, telephones in the room ring to wake-up or
remind the occupant of the next event or meeting. If Music on
hold is programmed for the system the occupant will hear music
when they answer a wake-up call.
Changing or cancelling an earlier selected Alarm time
To set a new time for an Alarm time, re-enter a new Alarm time.
The new time overwrites any earlier set time. Cancelling the
Alarm time for any telephone cancels the Alarm time for all the
telephones in the same room.
Cancelling the alarm
• To cancel the Alarm time on a Norstar telephone, press
Ä£¡àÞ. The display reads Alarm off.
• To cancel the Alarm time on an M7000 telephone, press
²£¡àÞ or press À£¡àÞ on
an analogue telephone.
Turning off the Alarm
When a telephone rings at the selected time, the occupant can
release the Alarm ring as follows:
• On a Norstar telephone, press any key except the ú
key.
• On an M7000 telephone, press any key except the ³
key.
• On an analogue telephone lift and replace the handset back
into position.
Note: If the user presses the ú or ³ key when
the telephone rings, it temporarily deactivates the Alarm.
After a number of minutes, the telephone will alert again.
If the user is on a call when the alarm sounds they can
press any key except ¨ to cancel the alarm and
maintain their active call.
Hospitality Services admin alarm feature
Only an Hospitality Services (HS) admin telephone can use the
Hospitality Services admin alarm feature. The HS admin alarm
feature is room oriented only, it does not control the alarms on
common extensions.
The Hospitality Services admin feature can:
• query the current or last alarm time set for a room
• overwrite previous Alarm time programming for a room on
the system
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Programming Hospitality Services 43
— assign an Alarm time for any room on the system
— change an Alarm time for any room on the system
— cancel an Alarm pending for any room on the system
To programme the Alarm time for a room with the Hospitality
Services admin alarm feature:
1. Press Ä¡àà on a two-line display Norstar
telephone.
2. If configured, the display reads Password:. Enter the Desk
admin password.
3. The display reads Al of rm#:. Enter the room number.
4. Press VIEW. The display shows Alrm: 07:00am OFF:. If the
alarm time is correct press the ON/OFF display key to activate
the alarm.
5. Enter a four digit alarm time.
— If the 24 hour format is used (hour: 00 to 23 and minutes:
00 to 59), no confirmation is required. The display shows
Alarm hh:mm ON.
— If the 12 hour format is used, the display shows the four
digit time plus AM or PM?. Press the AM or PM display key.
The display shows Alarm hh:mm am or pm ON.
6. Press the ¨ key to exit programming.
Room occupancy (RO)
The Room occupancy (RO) feature allows front desk operators to
assign dialling restrictions to room extensions, and also works
with the Room condition (RC) feature.
Dialling restrictions for room extensions, defined in
Restrictions under Terminals&Extns and Call restrns
under Hospitality in System prgrming, replace dialling filters
set under Services. The RO feature does not apply to common
extensions.
The RO feature uses the following room states: Vacant, Basic,
Mid, and Full. A variety of dialling filters can be configured for
each room states. The default setting is Vacant.
• Vacant — Room is empty.
• Basic — Room is occupied.
• Mid — Room is occupied.
• Full — Room is occupied.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
44 Programming Hospitality Services
Programming the state of a room extension
To access the Room Occupancy feature and assign the state of a
room extension:
1. Press Ä¡àá on a two-line display Norstar
telephone.
2. If configured, the display reads Password:. Enter the Desk
admin password.
3. The display reads Oc of rm#:. Enter the room number and
press OK or LIST.
4. The display reads rrrrr:Vacant. Press the CHANGE display
key and select the required status for the room extension:
Vacant, Basic, Mid or Full. The default setting is Vacant.
5. To programme other rooms, press the FIND or NEXT display
key and return to step 3. If no more rooms require
programming, press the ¨ key to exit programming.
Note: Programming a room to Vacant state cancels any
outstanding alarms.
Room condition (RC)
The Room condition (RC) feature allows users to exchange
information about the serviced state of a room. Users are front
desk attendants, cleaning or maintenance personnel of an
establishment. The RC feature is not available from a common
extension.
The Compact Plus system maintains a database of the state of
each room. This database is accessed from either the room
extension or a Hospitality Services admin telephone.You can set
a Room Condition password to limit access to this features. See
"Room condition password" on page 162.
Room extensions can:
• set the associated room’s state to Service done (Srvc done)
• set the associated room’s state to Needs service (Needs srvc)
• query the state of the associated room on a telephone with a
display.
Hospitality Services admin telephones can:
• set any room’s state to Service done (Srvc done)
• set any room’s state to Needs service (Needs srvc)
• query the state of any room.
The system changes the state of occupied rooms to Needs service
on a daily basis at a set time as configured in the system.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Programming Hospitality Services 45
Maintenance personnel programme the condition of the room to
Service done when service in the room is complete.
The front desk attendant can query or programme the condition
of a room with a Hospitality Services admin telephone. The
Compact Plus system automatically sets the status of a room to
Needs srvc, when a Room occupancy status changes from
occupied to Vacant.
Room condition with a room extension
To update the Room condition using a room extension:
1. Press Ä¡àß on a Norstar telephone;
press ²¡àß on an M7000 telephone or
press À¥¡àß on an analogue telephone.
2. At the prompt, enter the status of the room.
3. Press Ú on the dialpad to indicate Set to srv done.
If required, enter the Room condition password.
or,
Press Û on the dialpad to indicate Set to needs srv.
If required, enter the Room condition password.
4. On a Norstar telephone the display reads Set to srv done or
Set to needs srv. On an M7000 telephone or an analogue
telephone, replace the handset to exit.
Room condition with a Hospitality service admin telephone
To update or query the Room condition using a Hospitality
services admin telephone:
1. Press Ä¡à¡ on a two-line display Norstar
telephone.
2. If configured, the display reads Password:. Enter the Desk
admin password.
3. The display reads Cd of rm#:. Enter the room number and
press OK.
4. The display reads rrrrr:Vacant. Press the CHANGE display
key and select the required status for the room extension: if
the room is occupied, select Srvc done or Needs srvc; if the
room is vacant, select Vacant or Needs srvc. The default
setting is Vacant.
5. To update or query other room extensions, press the FIND or
NEXT display key and return to step 3. If there are no more
room extensions updates or queries, press the ¨ key to exit
programming.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
46 Programming Hospitality Services
Service time
The Service time heading of programming under
Hospitality in System prgrming allows for the installer or
system administrator to programme the time when occupied
rooms change state from Service done to Service required. The
Service time heading is an integral part of the Room condition
(RC) feature.
1. Press Ä¥¥‚¯öìéí. The display
reads Password:.
2. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
3. Press Ô until the display reads System prgrming.
4. Press ­. The display shows Hunt groups.
5. Press Ô until the display shows Hospitality.
6. Press ­. The display shows Room/desk info.
7. Press Ô until the display shows Service time.
8. Press ­. The display shows Hour:00.
9. Press the CHANGE display key. Enter the hour (00 to 23). If the
number is less than 13, the display shows AM. Press CHANGE
to select PM.
10. Press Ô. The display shows Minutes:00.
11. Press the CHANGE display key. Enter the minutes (00 to 59).
12. Press the ¨ key to exit programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Network features
• CLI blocking.........48
• Network Call Diversion.........48
• Selective Line Redirection.........50
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
48 Network features
CLI blocking
When activated, Calling line identification restriction (CLIR)
blocking, Ä¡Úá blocks the outgoing number CLI.
When this feature is used, the call is flagged to the exchange so
that the number will not be presented to the person being called.
On CLI supported lines, a call blocking digit sequence is sent to
the exchange before sending the dialout digits. You can change
these digits in System Prgrming and set it to the digit sequence
recognised by the local exchange for number blocking on a callby-call basis.
To cancel CLI blocking press Ä¡Úá.
Note: If you want CLI blocking to work on BRI trunks, the OLI
must be set to use CLI blocking. The OLI # setting must
not be set to None.
Network Call Diversion
Norstar Network Call Diversion (NCD) is a network function that
allows forwarding and redirection of calls outside the Norstar
network when using an ETSI ISDN line. Functionality is similar
to that of External Call Forward (ECF).
NCD redirects calls using the same line on which they arrive. Call
forward is efficient since there is no need for additional outside
lines.
Examples of NCD include:
• redirecting all calls from and extension to a mobile phone
• forwarding calls to an external destination (rather than to voice
mail, for example), when an extension is busy or the user is
unavailable.
Feature description
NCD is available only over ETSI ISDN lines. It invoked when
calls are presented to Norstar extensions over ISDN lines. The
user must program the selected extension. See “External Call
Forward” on page 250.
NCD is integrated with the following existing Norstar Call
Forward features:
• Call Forward Unconditional (CFU)—implemented on Norstar
Call Forward All Calls (CFAC) ÄÝ, and Selective
Line Redirection (SLR) Ä ¡ Ý, also referred to as
Line Redirection. This is programmable by the user.
• Call Forward on Busy (CFB)—implemented on Norstar Call
Forward Busy.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Network features 49
• Call Forward on No Response (CNFR)—implemented on
Norstar Call Forward No Answer.
NCD and line redirection
Forwarding calls externally from an extension requires the user to
enter either a Destination Code or Line Pool Access Code, and
the number to which calls will be forwarded.
Line types described
The points below describe which diversion feature is invoked
depending on the type of line in use.
• When a call comes in on ETSI ISDN (BRI or PRI) and is
diverted back to the PSTN, then ETSI CFU, CFB or CFNR is
used.
• When a call comes in on DPNSS 1 and is diverted on DPNSS
1, then DPNSS 1 Diversion (DIV) is used.
• When a call comes in on other line types, External Call
Forward is used. Note that under certain line conditions, ECF
will not work; refer to Line Redirection restrictions. See “Line
Redirection” on page page 252.
Note: In all cases, if NCD fails due to network errors or
rejections, Norstar invokes ECF. If an outgoing line is
unavailable, Norstar routes the call to the line’s prime
extension.
Programming and restrictions
NCD features are accessed through existing Norstar features.
Extensions requiring redirection must be programmed
individually to either CFAC or SLR. CFB or CFNA must be set
during programming. Allow redirect must be set to Yes for
each extension, in Terminals&Extns/Capabilities.
Note: Any other programming applied to specific lines and
extensions take precedence, for example
Restrictions(extns) under Terminals&Extns.
NCD is used as long as the affected lines are ETSI ISDN, and the
affected DIA lines are accessible via ISDN lines. Incoming calls
are diverted back to the PSTN. If NCD fails due to network
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
50 Network features
errors, ECF is invoked. If ECF cannot be executed, the incoming
call is routed to the line’s prime extension.
ATTENTION!
If a line is configured to appear on several extensions
with redirection programmed, predicting which
extension will divert the call is not possible. This should
be considered during system configuration.
An extension with CFB, CFNA and CFAC programmed will give
priority to CFAC for diversion.
Selective Line Redirection
Selective Line Redirection (SLR), also referred to as Line
Redirection, is enhanced for use with digital lines and operates in
conjunction with NCD.
Diversion by SLR takes precedence over diversion by CFAC. An
SLR line cannot be diverted by CFAC. If the call arrives on an
extension with SLR programmed, a ring splash will sound (if
programmed).
For information on redirecting lines and SLR restrictions refer to
“Line Redirection” on page 252.
Programming Extensions
The User Interface for programming NCD is the same for ECF.
Different types of Call Forward are available depending on the
extension being programmed. Programming an extension to
forward calls externally requires the user to enter a destination
code or line pool number, in addition to the external phone
number. Therefore, care should be taken to identify your network
line types and record the available codes and line pools.
Norstar—NCD functionality in CFAC, CFB and CFNO is
supported on Norstar N7XXX extensions.
ISDN—NCD functionality in CFAC and CFNA is supported on
ISDN terminals. CFB and SLR are not supported on ISDN.
Cordless Handsets—NCD functionality in CFAC, CFB, and
CFNA is supported on cordless handset extensions. SLR is not
supported on cordless handsets.
Enhanced Caller ID
When a Norstar extension with Call Line Identifier (CLID)
programmed receives a redirected call due to NCD, the user will
see the DN for the Calling Number. This is followed by a “>” and
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Network features 51
the redirecting number. This is displayed for as long as the call is
active (alerting or answered) at that set.
If the alerting extension is not the CLID extension for that line,
the line appearance can be pressed to briefly display the
information. Pressing Ä¡ÚÚ or INFO while the call
is active invokes Call Info. Call Info on DPNSS displays the
redirecting number and the reason for the redirection.
Note: When Norstar requests that an incoming call be redirected
by the distance network, Norstar does not inform the
network of the redirecting extension number. In this case,
the diverted-to party will not see the diverting party
extension number.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
52 Network features
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Software Keys
• Viewing the System ID.........54
• Software Keys.........54
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
54 Software Keys
Viewing the System ID
You can view the System ID during a programming session in
Software Keys.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows Software Keys.
5. Press ­. The display shows SysID: followed by the
unique System ID number.
6. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Software Keys
Software Keys are password numbers provided by the installer.
They are required by the system if you want to enable the Auto
Attendant.
You are given three keys (passwords), consisting of eight digits
each. These numbers are entered in the Compact Plus system
through programming using the Prime extension and the
Software Keys heading. Once the Software Keys are entered, the
system makes the corresponding capability available.
Record the passwords in the Programming Record. You need the
numbers to restore an upgraded system after a cold start.
Entering the Software Keys
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. PressÄ¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows Software Keys.
5. Press ­. The display shows Sys ID:.
6. Press Ô. The display shows Password keys.
7. Press ­. The display shows Key 1:.
8. Enter the eight-digit password number for Key 1. Use BKSP
to make corrections. As soon as the eighth digit is entered, the
display shows Key 2:.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Software Keys 55
9. Enter the eight-digit password number for Key 2. The display
shows Key 3:.
10. Enter the eight-digit password number for Key 3.
11. Press OK. The display shows Entry successful.
12. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
56 Software Keys
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Setting System speed dial
• Setting System speed dial.........58
• Assigning a number to a System speed dial code.........58
• Selecting a line.........59
• Setting the system to display a name instead of a number.........59
• Setting whether the speed dial number bypasses restrictions.........60
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
58 Setting System speed dial
Setting System speed dial
Speed dial saves time by allowing you to dial frequently called
numbers using a two-digit code. For example, you can
programme telephone numbers for major suppliers or clients for
easy dialling by everyone in the office.
Speed dial codes numbered from 01 to 70 are intended for
system-wide use. Speed dial codes from 71 to 94 are for personal
use and can be programmed differently at each extension. See
"Changing a personal (user) speed dial code" on page 107 for
more information on the Speed dial feature.
The steps to programming System speed dial are:
• assign a number to a System speed dial code
• select an outgoing facility to be used for the number
• set whether the system displays the number or a name
(optional)
• set whether the speed dial number bypasses any restrictions on
the line or extension where it is used (optional).
See "Chart 1: System Speed Dial" on page 288 in Appendix A for
a programming overview.
See also "Using Speed Dial" on page 215.
Assigning a number to a System speed dial code
First, choose a two-digit speed dial code (from 01 to 70) and then
assign a telephone number to it.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows Sys speed dial.
5. Press ­. The display shows Speed dial #:.
6. Enter the System speed dial code (01 to 70).
7. Press ­. The display shows the number currently
assigned to the code or No number.
8. Press CHANGE.
9. Enter the telephone number (up to 24 digits) and press OK.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Setting System speed dial 59
Selecting a line
After assigning a telephone number to the speed dial code, you
must select an outgoing facility for the number to use. Choose a
Prime line, an exchange line, a line pool, or the routing table.
When you programme a line pool as part of a speed dial number,
use Æ and the line pool access code, or a programmed
line pool key.
If you assign a specific line to a System speed dial number, only
extensions with an appearance of that line can use the speed dial
number.
1. Begin with the display showing the speed dial code you just
changed in the previous procedure.
2. Press Ô. The display shows Use prime line.
3. Press CHANGE to choose Use prime line, Use routing tabl, Use
line, or Pool code. Stop pressing CHANGE when you see the
line you want to use for the speed dial.
4. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Setting the system to display a name instead of a number
You can choose to have the display show either the extension
number or a name for a speed dial code. For example, you could
programme a speed dial for a frequently used courier and have the
display show Courier instead of the courier’s telephone number.
System speed dial names can be 16 characters long. The default
displays the number.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows Sys speed dial.
5. Press ­. The display shows Speed dial#:.
6. Enter the System speed dial code (01 to 70) you want to use.
7. Press ­. The display shows the number currently
assigned to the code, or No number.
8. Press CHANGE.
9. Use the keypad to enter the telephone number (up to 24 digits)
and press OK.
10. Press Ô. The display shows Use prime line.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
60 Setting System speed dial
11. Press CHANGE to choose Use prime line, Use routing tbl, Use
line:, or Pool code:. Stop pressing CHANGE when you see the
line you want to use for the speed dial.
12. Press Ô. The display shows Display digits:.
13. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No). No means the
display shows a name for the code.
14. Press Ô. The display shows Name:Sys spd diÉ.
Press ­ to see the rest of the display.
15. Press CHANGE. The display shows Name:.
16. Enter the name you want to give to the speed dial code by
pressing the appropriate key on the keypad until the first letter
of the name is displayed. Press -->, then enter the next letter
of the name and so on until the name is complete. Up to 16
characters are allowed. Press # to add spaces.
17. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Setting whether the speed dial number bypasses
restrictions
System speed dial numbers are generally subject to any
restrictions that are programmed in the Compact Plus system, but
they can be programmed to bypass these restrictions. The default
setting is N (No), which means the number is subject to normal
call restrictions.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows Sys speed dial.
5. Press ­. The display shows Speed dial #:.
6. Enter the System speed dial code (01 to 70).
7. Press ­. The display shows the number currently
assigned to the code, or No number.
8. Press CHANGE.
9. Enter the telephone number (up to 24 digits) and press OK.
10. Press Ô until the display shows Bypass restrÕn:.
11. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No).
12. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Naming extensions and lines
• Naming extensions.........62
• Naming lines.........63
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
62 Naming extensions and lines
Naming extensions
You can personalise your office communications by assigning
names to lines and extensions in the Norstar system. The
extension's default name is its extension number (for example,
Extn 221). The line’s default name is its line number (for
example, Line 001).
Names can be seven characters long. Line and extension names
can contain both letters and numbers, but not # and *. To avoid
confusion, do not assign the same name to two extensions, two
lines, or to both an extension and a line in your system. Use
creative combinations of initials, abbreviations, or even
nicknames, to give each extension a unique name.
As the administrator, you can programme the system so that,
when you enter an internal extension number, the person’s name
appears on your telephone display. At the same time, the person
you are calling sees your name on their display.
See ‘Chart 2: Naming extensions’ on page 288 in Appendix A for
a programming overview.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ­. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ­. The display shows Line access.
7. Press Ô until the display shows Name:.
8. Press CHANGE.
9. Enter the characters of the name using the key pad by pressing
--> after each letter or press Ô to restore the default
name.
10. Press Ô to store the name.
11. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Naming extensions and lines 63
Naming lines
Assigning names to lines can help you identify incoming calls.
For example, if both the Sales line and the Service line ring at
your extension, your display shows which line the call is on,
Sales or Service, when the line key is pressed or the handset is
lifted.
If the Sales department is in a meeting and they forward their
lines to your extension, the telephone display shows Sales for
any incoming calls on their lines.
See ‘Chart 3: Naming lines’ on page 289 in Appendix A, for a
programming overview.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô. The display shows Lines.
5. Press ­. The display shows Show line:.
6. Enter the line number. Press ­. The display shows
the current name.
7. Press CHANGE.
8. Enter the characters of the name using the keypad or press
Ô to restore the default name.
9. Press Ô to store the name.
10. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
64 Naming extensions and lines
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Changing the time and date
• Changing the time and date.........66
• Changing the time.........66
• Changing the date.........67
• Changing the time and date using the Basic password.........67
• Changing the time by an hour.........68
• Automatic Time & Date.........68
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
66 Changing the time and date
Changing the time and date
The current time and date appear on the display of idle Norstar
telephones. Telephones connected to an Analogue Terminal
Adapter cannot display the time and date. Whenever the mains is
interrupted, the time is lost on the clock and needs
reprogramming.
Note: You need only change the time and date at one Norstar
telephone. The clock is reset for the entire system.
The clock also controls the schedules used for services such as
ringing and routing.
After a power failure, the clock is behind by the length of time
power was lost. For example, if the power is out for two minutes,
the clock is two minutes behind.
See ‘Chart 4: Time and Date’ on page 289 in Appendix A for a
programming overview.
Changing the time
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press ÛÜßÝß (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ôuntil the display shows Time&Date.
5. Press ­. The display shows Hour:.
6. Press CHANGE (or NEXT if you do not need to change the hour).
7. Enter the hour (00 to 23). If the number is less than 13, the
display shows AM. Press CHANGE to select PM.
8. Press Ô. The display shows Minutes:.
9. Press CHANGE.
10. Enter the minutes (00 to 59).
11. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Changing the time and date 67
Changing the date
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press ÛÜßÝß (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows Time&Date.
5. Press ­. The display shows Hour:.
6. Press Ô twice. The display shows Year:.
7. Press CHANGE.
8. Enter the last two digits of the current year.
9. Press Ô. The display shows Month:.
10. Enter the month (01 to 12).
11. Press Ô. The display shows Day:.
12. Press CHANGE.
13. Enter the day of the month (01 to 31).
14. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Changing the time and date using the Basic password
You can change the time and date using
Ä¥¥¡ÝßÜ (TIME) and the Basic password.
1. Press Ä¥¥¡ÝßÜ (TIME). The display
shows Password :.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛÛàÝÛ (BASIC). The
display shows Hour:.
3. Press CHANGE (or NEXT if you do not need to change the hour).
4. Enter the hour (00 to 23). If the number is less than 13, the
display shows AM. Press CHANGE to select PM.
5. Press NEXT. The display shows Minutes:.
6. Press CHANGE (or NEXT if you do not need to change the
minutes).
7. Enter the minutes (00 to 59).
8. Press NEXT. The display shows Year:.
9. Press CHANGE (or NEXT if you do not need to change the year).
10. Enter the last two digits of the current year.
11. Press NEXT. The display shows Month:.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
68 Changing the time and date
12. Press CHANGE (or NEXT if you do not need to change the
month).
13. Enter the month (01 to 12).
14. Press NEXT. The display shows Day:.
15. Press CHANGE.
16. Enter the day of the month (01 to 31).
17. Press ¨ to exit.
Changing the time by an hour
Norstar offers two features that let you adjust the time quickly for
changes in British Standard Time.
Moving one hour forward with ** FWD
1. Press Ä¥¥ÜáÜ (FWD). The display shows
Forward by 1Hr?.
2. Press YES. The display briefly shows Time Changed.
Moving one hour backward with ** BACK
1. Press Ä¥¥ÛÛÛÞ (BACK). The display
shows Backward by 1Hr?.
2. Press YES. The display briefly shows Time Changed.
Automatic Time & Date
When a Basic Rate Interface (BRI) outgoing call is answered, the
network may provide time and date information to the Norstar
system. The Auto Time&Date feature enables the Norstar system
to use this information to automatically update the time and date
on the Norstar system.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ÛÜßÝß (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press Ô. The display shows Featr settings.
6. Press ­. The display shows Backgrnd music:.
7. Press Ô until the display shows AutoTime&Date.
8. Press CHANGE to choose Y or N.
9. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Assigning a Direct-Dial extension
• Programming Direct-Dial.........70
• Programming an internal Direct-Dial extension.........70
• Programming an external Direct-Dial extension.........71
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
70 Assigning a Direct-Dial extension
Programming Direct-Dial
Direct-Dial lets you dial a designated telephone in your Compact
Plus system or private network with a single digit. The DirectDial digit is the digit you dial to reach an attendant in your office.
You can have one Direct-Dial extension in your Norstar system.
A person whose telephone is a Direct-Dial extension is usually a
receptionist for your entire office or for a particular department.
The Direct-Dial telephone can send up to 30 messages and can
invoke services to activate the extra-dial telephone.
You cannot forward calls to a Direct-Dial telephone that is
outside your Compact Plus system.
Note that ISDN terminals cannot use the Direct-Dial digit to
reach a Direct-Dial extension.
For information on which telephones can access the Direct-Dial
extension, see ‘Assigning telephones to the Direct-Dial
extension’ on page 98.
See ‘Chart 5: Direct-Dial’ on page 290 in Appendix A for a
programming overview.
See ‘Accessing a Direct-Dial extension’ on page 242 for
information on using the Direct-Dial feature.
Programming an internal Direct-Dial extension
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ­. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press Ô. until the display shows Direct-dial.
7. Press ­. The display shows D-Dial1:Intrnl.
8. Press ­. The display shows Intrnl #:.
9. Press CHANGE.
10. Enter the extension number.
11. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Assigning a Direct-Dial extension 71
Programming an external Direct-Dial extension
When you assign an external number as the Direct-Dial
extension, you must also specify whether to use a Prime line,
exchange line, line pool, or routing table to place the call.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ­. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press Ô. until the display shows Direct-dial.
7. Press ­. The display shows D-Dial1:Intrnl.
8. Press CHANGE to switch to Extrnl.
9. Press ­. The display shows Extrnl#:.
10. Press CHANGE, then enter up to 24 digits for the external
number.
11. Press OK. The display shows the number you have entered.
12. Press Ô. The display shows the facility.
13. Press CHANGE until the display shows the facility you want.
Options are Use Prime line, Use line:, Pool code:, or
Use routing tabl.
14. If you choose Use line or Pool code, you must enter a line
number or pool code. If you choose Use routing tabl, you
must enter a destination code.
15. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
72 Assigning a Direct-Dial extension
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Barring calls and privileges (Restrictions)
• Using restriction filters to bar calls.........74
• Assigning filters to a telephone (Extn restrns).........77
• Assigning filters to a line (Line restrns).........78
• Assigning filters to a specific line/extension (Line/extn restrns).........79
• Class of Service passwords.........80
• Assigning a remote access filter.........83
• Locking an extension.........86
• Preventing Last Number Redial.........87
• Preventing Saved Number Redial.........88
• Preventing Recall.........89
• Preventing Redirect.........89
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
74 Barring calls and privileges (Restrictions)
Using restriction filters to bar calls
Restrictions are digits that the system does not accept during
dialling. Overrides are digits that the system accepts in spite of
the restrictions. Groups of restrictions and overrides are
programmed into restriction filters.
Rather than define individual restrictions and apply them
repeatedly to each telephone and line, a restriction filter allows
you to apply restrictions as a single package of dialling sequences
that are not permitted.
Different filters can be applied to
• lines, to prevent telephones that share a line from dialling
restricted numbers
• extensions, to prevent a specific telephone from dialling
restricted numbers
• a combination of line and extension, to allow specific
telephones to be exempt from the line filter
For example, a manager and four employees share a line but
the employees have a line/extension filter that restricts the
calls they can make on that line.
• AC15A private circuits, to prevent people from using your
network to make restricted calls
The number of restriction filters that you have for your system
depends on a number of factors. You may want to have different
restrictions for different times of the day (such as barring
long-distance calls after work hours). You may want different
restrictions for a telephone that clients may use.
Default filters
You may not have to create or change a filter. Some of the more
popular filters that restrict long-distance calls exist by default.
The following table shows the default restriction filters that the
Compact Plus system provides.
Filter 01 prevents you from dialling any number that begins with
0 or 1, except when the number begins with 0-800.
Filter 05 prevents you from dialling any number that begins with
010, 1, and 00.
Filter 06 prevents you from dialling numbers that begin with any
digit.
You may change the default filters before you apply them. For
instance, you might add override 002 to Restriction 02,
permitting calls to 1-800.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Barring calls and privileges (Restrictions) 75
Restriction filter defaults
Filter
Restrictions (denied)
Overrides
00
No restrictions (cannot be changed)
01
01: 0
001: 0800
02: 1
02
No restrictions
03
No restrictions
04
No restrictions
05
01: 010
02: 1
03: 00
06
01: •
(the dot represents any digit)
07 - 99
No restrictions or overrides programmed
Customising a call barring filter
You can customise default filters for your needs before you apply
them. You can
• create a new restriction filter
• add or remove restrictions
• add or remove overrides
The rules for adding and creating filters are as follows:
• You can have up to 100 restriction filters.
• There is a maximum of 400 restrictions and overrides
allocated to the 100 programmable filters.
• Each programmable filter can have up to 48 restrictions. There
is no limit on the number of overrides that can be allocated to
a restriction.
• You can use any restriction or override in more than one filter.
Each time it is used, it counts as one entry. For example, if
restriction 411 exists in filters 01, 02, and 03, it uses up three
of the 400 entries available.
• You can use ¥ and £ in a sequence of numbers in either a
restriction or an override. These characters are often used as
part of feature codes for other systems or for features provided
by the public switched telephone network (PSTN).
• The maximum length of a restriction is 15 digits. The
maximum length of an override is 16 digits.
• The solid dot (•) can represent any digit. It is inserted by
pressing ANY.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
76 Barring calls and privileges (Restrictions)
• When you are finished programming restrictions for one
extension, you can copy those settings to other extensions by
using COPY at the Restrictions ö display. For more
information about copying extension programming, see
‘Restriction service’ on page 148.
• You cannot delete a filter but you can delete a restriction
within a filter. Removing the restrictions programmed on a
filter makes it an unrestricted filter, but the filter itself is not
removed.
Removing a restriction changes the
identifying number of the
restriction.
Removing a restriction removes the overrides
associated with it, and changes the
identifying number of the restriction. For
example, removal of restriction 01 renumbers restrictions 01 to 08 as 01 to 07.
Applying restriction filters
Once you create the filters, you can assign the restrictions to a
telephone (under Terminals&Extns), to a line (under Lines), to a
particular line on a telephone (under Terminals&Extns), and to
remote callers (under Remote access).
To assign restriction filters for different times of the day, see
‘Restriction service’ on page 148.
See ‘Chart 6: Restriction filters’ on page 291 in Appendix A for
a programming overview.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ­. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ­. The display shows Line access.
7. Press Ô until the display shows Restrictions.
8. Press ­. The display shows Restrn filters.
9. Press ­. The display shows Show filter:.
10. Enter the two-digit code or press Ô.
11. Press ­.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Barring calls and privileges (Restrictions) 77
12. Use REMOVE, ADD, the keypad, and OK to change the
restrictions for the filter.
13. Press ­, then Ô to see the overrides for the
restriction.
14. Use REMOVE, ADD, the keypad, and OK to change the overrides
for the restriction.
15. Press ¨ to quit or Ô to continue programming.
Assigning filters to a telephone (Extn restrns)
Extension restrictions lets you assign a restriction filter to a
telephone to prevent certain numbers from being dialled from
that telephone. You can assign a different restriction filter for
normal service and for each of six schedules.
See ‘Using alternate or scheduled services’ on page 146 for more
information about the schedules.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ­. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ­. The display shows Line access.
7. Press Ô until the display shows Restrictions.
8. Press ­. The display shows Restrn filters.
9. Press Ô. The display shows Extn restrns.
10. Press ­. The display shows Filters.
11. Press ­. The display shows Normal:.
12. Press CHANGE and use the keypad to enter the number of the
restriction filter to be assigned to the extension for each
schedule.
13. Press ¨ to quit or Ô to continue programming.
The following table shows the default restrictions.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
78 Barring calls and privileges (Restrictions)
Default filters for extensions
Schedule
Restriction filter
Normal
02
Sched 1 (Night)
11
Sched 2 (Evening)
12
Sched 3 (Lunch)
13
Sched 4
00
Sched 5
00
Sched 6
00
This means, for example, that if you enter a set of restrictions for
filter 11, they are automatically applied when the Night schedule
is in use.
Assigning filters to a line (Line restrns)
Line restrictions let you assign a restriction filter to a line to
prevent certain numbers from being dialled from any telephone
with that line appearance. You can assign a different restriction
filter for normal service and for each of six schedules. See‘Using
alternate or scheduled services’ on page 146 for more
information about the schedules.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô. The displays shows Lines.
5. Press ­. The display shows Show line:.
6. Enter the line number.
7. Press ­. The display shows Name:.
8. Press Ô until the display shows Restrictions.
9. Press ­. The display shows Restrn filters.
10. Press Ô. The display shows Line restrns.
11. Press ­. The display shows Normal:.
12. Press CHANGE and use the keypad to enter the number of the
restriction filter to be assigned to the line for each schedule.
13. Press ¨ to quit or Ô to continue programming.
The following table shows the default restrictions.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Barring calls and privileges (Restrictions) 79
Default filters for extensions
Schedule
Restriction filter
Normal
03
Sched 1 (Night)
21
Sched 2 (Evening)
22
Sched 3 (Lunch)
23
Sched 4
00
Sched 5
00
Sched 6
00
This means, for example, that if you enter a set of restrictions for
filter 21, they are automatically applied when the Night schedule
is in use.
Assigning filters to a specific line/extension (Line/extn
restrns)
Line/extension restrictions let you assign a restriction filter to a
specific line that can be used for outgoing calls at a specific
telephone. This type of filter replaces any line or extension
restriction filters that might otherwise apply. It restricts the
numbers you can dial on a line, but only from that telephone. The
same line on another telephone can have different restrictions.
As with extension restrictions, you can apply a different line or
extension restriction for normal service and for each of six
schedules. A maximum of 255 line/extension restrictions may be
applied to lines at telephones.
If a line/extension restriction is assigned to a line at a particular
telephone, it overrides any line restrictions or extension
restrictions that might otherwise apply.
If no line/extension restrictions have been defined, the numbers
are checked against the extension restrictions and the line
restrictions, if either of these have been defined. The numbers
may be rejected by either restriction.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ­. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ­. The display shows Line access.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
80 Barring calls and privileges (Restrictions)
7. Press Ô until the display shows Restrictions.
8. Press ­. The display shows Restrn filters.
9. Press Ô until the display shows Line/extn rstrn.
10. Press ­. The display shows Show line:.
11. Enter the line number.
12. Press ­. The display shows Normal:.
13. Press CHANGE and use the keypad to enter the number of the
filter to be assigned as the line/extension restriction for each
schedule. There are no default line/extension restrictions.
14. Press ¨ to quit or Ô to continue programming.
Class of Service passwords
Call barring shows you how to customise and apply dialling
filters to restrict calls. You can temporarily override these filters
with a Class of Service (COS) password. The COS passwords
replace one set of filters with another to allow someone to make
calls that would otherwise be restricted, without giving them
complete freedom to make every kind of call. The COS
passwords let you define individual passwords and determine the
restriction filter and remote package associated with each.
A system can have a maximum of 100 six-digit COS passwords,
ranging from 00 to 99. Each password consists of a user filter,
which replaces the current extension or line/extension filter, and
a line filter, which replaces the current line filter.
Your COS password is in effect only for the duration of your call
and does not affect the restrictions placed on other users of the
system.
The COS passwords for a system should be determined randomly
and should be changed regularly. Employee COS passwords
should be deleted when they leave the company.
Typically, each user has a separate COS password. However,
several users can share a password or one user can have several
passwords. Users should memorise their COS passwords instead
of writing them down.
You can use COPY and the keypad to copy the restriction filters
and remote package from one COS password to another. The
COS passwords must be unique.
Before you begin programming a COS password, make sure you
have defined the appropriate restriction filters in Restrictions
under Lines. Then check that you have created a suitable remote
package in Remote access under System prgrming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Barring calls and privileges (Restrictions) 81
See ‘Using Class of Service passwords’ on page 240 for
information on using this feature.
Selecting a COS password
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. PressÄ¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows Passwords.
5. Press ­. The display shows COS pswds.
6. Press ­. The displays shows Show paswd #:.
7. Enter a two-digit password (00 to 99).
8. Press ­. The display shows the setting for that COS
password.
9. Press CHANGE.
10. Enter a password (maximum six digits).
11. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Assigning user restrictions to the COS password
A COS password can be used by internal and external users;
therefore, you must assign restrictions for the user instead of for
the extension.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. PressÄ¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows Passwords.
5. Press ­. The display shows COS pswds.
6. Press ­. The displays shows Show paswd #:.
7. Enter a two-digit password (00 to 99).
8. Press ­. The display shows the setting for that COS
password.
9. Press Ô. The display shows User flt:.
10. Press CHANGE.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
82 Barring calls and privileges (Restrictions)
11. Enter the number for the restriction filter to be applied with
this COS password.
12. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Assigning line restrictions to the COS password
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. PressÄ¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows Passwords.
5. Press ­. The display shows COS pswds.
6. Press ­. The displays shows Show paswd #:.
7. Enter a two-digit password (00 to 99).
8. Press ­. The display shows the setting for that COS
password.
9. Press Ô until the display shows Line flt:.
10. Press CHANGE.
11. Enter the number for the restriction that applies to the line
when this COS password is used.
12. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Assigning a remote package to the COS password
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows Passwords.
5. Press ­. The display shows COS pswds.
6. Press ­. The displays shows Show paswd #:.
7. Enter a two-digit password (00 to 99).
8. Press ­. The display shows the setting for that COS
password.
9. Press Ô until the display shows Remote pkg:.
10. Press CHANGE.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Barring calls and privileges (Restrictions) 83
11. Enter the number of the remote package that applies with this
COS password.
12. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Assigning a remote access filter
People on other systems in your private network can dial into
your system over AC15A private circuits or exchange lines and
make outgoing calls from your system. Therefore, you may want
to limit the numbers that can be dialled over AC15A private
circuits and exchange lines. You do this by assigning a remote
access filter to the AC15A private circuits or exchange lines.
See ‘Chart 7: Remote Access Packages’ on page 292 in Appendix
A for a programming overview.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ­. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press Ô until the display shows Remote access.
7. Press ­ twice. The display shows Show pkg:.
8. Enter a package number.
9. Press ­. The display shows LinePool access.
10. Press ­. The display shows Pool A:.
11. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No).
12. Press Ð.
13. Press Ô. The display shows Remote page:.
14. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No).
15. Press Ô. The display shows Remote admin:.
16. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No).
17. Press Ô. The display shows Remote monitor:.
18. Press Ð.
19. Press ­. The display shows Rem access pkgs.
20. Press Ô. The display shows Rem line access.
21. Press ­. The display shows Show line:.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
84 Barring calls and privileges (Restrictions)
22. Enter the number of the AC15A private circuit (061 or 062).
The displays shows the line number followed by Rem pkg:.
23. Press CHANGE.
24. Enter the number of the remote package that you just created.
25. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue in programming.
Setting up a new COS password
As the Administrator you set up the COS passwords. You choose
a password number, the password, and finally the user and line
filters for your new Class of Service.
If you leave the user or line filter settings at Deflt, the current
filter is retained for this Class of Service. You may assign a new
filter to either the user or line filter, or to both, depending on your
needs. You must change at least one of them, or your Class of
Service is no different from ordinary service.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows Passwords.
5. Press ­. The display shows COS pswds.
6. Press ­. The display shows Show pswd #:.
7. Enter an unused password number (00 to 99). The display
shows COS pswd # followed by the number you chose.
8. Press ­. The display shows Pswdnn: and the current
setting.
9. Press CHANGE.
10. Enter six digits for the new password.
11. Press Ô. The display shows User flt: and the
current setting.
12. If you are changing the user filter, press CHANGE. The display
shows User fltr:.
13. Enter the two-digit number of an existing dialling filter.
14. Press Ô. The display shows Line fltr: and the
current setting.
15. If you are changing the line filter, press CHANGE. The display
shows Line fltr:.
16. Enter the two-digit number of an existing dialling filter.
17. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Barring calls and privileges (Restrictions) 85
Changing an existing COS password
To maintain the security of a Class of Service password, it is a
good idea to change it frequently.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows Passwords.
5. Press ­. The display shows COS pswds.
6. Press ­. The display shows Show pswd #:.
7. Enter the password number of the COS password you want to
change (00 to 99).
8. Press ­. The display shows Pswd, followed by the
number you chose and the current password.
9. Press CHANGE.
10. Enter six digits for the new password.
11. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Changing the filters assigned to an existing COS password
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows Passwords.
5. Press ­. The display shows COS pswds.
6. Press ­. The display shows Show pswd #:.
7. Enter the password number of the COS password whose filter
you want to change (00 to 99).
8. Press ­. The display shows Pswd, followed by the
number you chose and the current password.
9. Press Ô. The display shows User flt: and the
current setting.
10. If you are changing the user filter, press CHANGE. The display
shows User fltr:.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
86 Barring calls and privileges (Restrictions)
11. Enter the two-digit number of an existing dialling filter or
leave blank to return to the default filter.
12. Press Ô. The display shows Line fltr: and the
current filter assigned.
13. If you are changing the line filter, press CHANGE. The display
shows Line fltr:.
14. Enter the two-digit number of an existing dialling filter or
leave blank to return to the default filter.
15. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Erasing an existing COS password
When a Class of Service password is no longer needed, you can
erase it.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows Passwords.
5. Press ­. The display shows COS pswds.
6. Press ­. The display shows Show pswd #:.
7. Enter the password number of the COS password you want to
erase (00 to 99).
8. Press ­. The display shows Pswd, followed by the
number you chose and current password.
9. Press CLR.
10. Press Ô.
11. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Locking an extension
You can limit the number of features that can be used or
programmed at a particular extension. The options are
• None (default)— not locked. You can programme any system
or extension setting.
• Full—fully locked. You can programme only these settings:
display contrast, ring type, ring volume, and volume control.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Barring calls and privileges (Restrictions) 87
• Partial—partly locked. You can programme most extension
settings. You cannot programme system settings, personal
speed dial codes, dialling mode, or memory keys; and you
cannot move line keys or enable Voice Call Deny.
Note: Do not apply extension lock to the extension you use to
programme the system. There must be at least one
M7310N or M7324N telephone in the system that has
extension lock set to None, or you will not be able to
programme the system.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ­. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to
programme. The displays shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ­. The display shows Line access.
7. Press Ô until the display shows Restrictions.
8. Press ­. The display shows Restrn filters.
9. Press Ô. The display shows Extn restrns.
10. Press ­. The display shows Filters.
11. Press Ô. The display shows ExtnLock:.
12. Press CHANGE to select None, Full, or Partial.
13. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Preventing Last Number Redial
Under some conditions, a telephone may be used by customers or
clients. You can prevent non-employees from accessing sensitive
numbers by blocking certain features at the telephone. The
default setting allows an extension to use the Last Number Redial
feature.
See ‘Chart 8: Extension restrictions’ on page 293 in Appendix A
for a programming overview.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
88 Barring calls and privileges (Restrictions)
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ­. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ­. The display shows Line access.
7. Press Ô until the display shows Restrictions.
8. Press ­. The display shows Restrn filters.
9. Press Ô. The display shows Extn restrns.
10. Press ­. The display shows Filters.
11. Press Ô until the display shows Allow last no:
12. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No).
13. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Preventing Saved Number Redial
The default setting allows an extension to use the Saved Number
Redial feature.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ­. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ­. The display shows Line access.
7. Press Ô until the display shows Restrictions.
8. Press ­. The display shows Restrn filters.
9. Press Ô. The display shows Extn restrns.
10. Press ­. The display shows Filters.
11. Press Ô until the display shows Allow saved no:.
12. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No).
13. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Barring calls and privileges (Restrictions) 89
Preventing Recall
The default setting allows an extension to use the Recall feature.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ­. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ­. The display shows Line access.
7. Press Ô until the display shows Restrictions.
8. Press ­. The display shows Restrn filters.
9. Press Ô until the display shows Extn restrns.
10. Press ­.
11. Press Ô until the display shows Allow recall:.
12. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No).
13. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Preventing Redirect
The default setting allows an extension to use the Redirect
feature.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ­. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ­. The display shows Line access.
7. Press Ô until the display shows Restrictions.
8. Press ­. The display shows Restrn filters.
9. Press Ô until the display shows Extn restrns.
10. Press ­.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
90 Barring calls and privileges (Restrictions)
11. Press Ô until the display shows Allow redirect:.
12. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No).
13. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Programming capabilities
• Programming an extension.........92
• Setting Call Forward no answer.........92
• Setting Call Forward on Busy.........94
• Programming Do Not Disturb on Busy.........94
• Programming Handsfree.........95
• Programming Handsfree answerback.........96
• Assigning a Pickup group.........97
• Assigning a page zone.........97
• Programming paging.........98
• Assigning telephones to the Direct-Dial extension.........98
• Allowing Priority call.........99
• Assigning a Hotline.........100
• Auxiliary ringer.........101
• Activating Redirect ring.........101
• Receive tones.........102
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
92 Programming capabilities
Programming an extension
Many features that can be used at individual extensions (see
‘Appendix A: Programming overviews’ on page 287) must first
be programmed for use. As the Administrator, you can
• programme Full and Automatic Handsfree
• assign Pickup Groups to allow colleagues to easily answer
calls ringing at a telephone other than their own
• assign page zones so that colleagues can page within their
groups without disturbing the whole office
• programme an auxiliary ringer (loud bell) that alerts you when
there are incoming calls to an extension
• assign a Direct-Dial extension so your colleagues can reach an
attendant by dialling just one digit
• set Call Forward so that all calls are answered when people’s
telephones are busy or unanswered
• programme Do Not Disturb on Busy
• activate Redirect Ring
• assign a Hotline extension to call one number automatically
• allow Priority call
See ‘Chart 9: Extension capabilities 1’ on page 294 in Appendix
A for a programming overview.
Setting Call Forward no answer
When you set the system up to forward calls that are not answered
at a particular telephone, you must define the extension that the
calls are sent to and the number of times that an incoming call
rings before the call is forwarded. You can choose 2, 3, 4, 6, and
10 rings. The default is 4 rings.
Note: If the extension that you are forwarding calls to does not
have a free intercom key, or has Do Not Disturb or Do Not
Disturb on busy activated, the incoming call continues to
visually alert at your telephone, and the caller continues to
hear ringback.
If this is not desirable, you can programme a Call Forward
on Busy or Call Forward no answer destination for the
second extension.
For example, extension 224 is programmed to forward all
incoming calls to extension 235, which in turn is
programmed to forward all incoming calls to extension
240.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Programming capabilities 93
Unanswered calls coming in on an outside line are
automatically transferred to the Prime extension for that
line.
If the extension is a member of a hunt group, the Call Forward no
answer feature is overridden and the hunt group call will continue
to ring until the hunt time has expired.
A hunt group extension can be a Call Forward on busy extension.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press ÛÜßÝß (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ­. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ­ three times. The display shows Fwd
to:None.
7. Press CHANGE and enter the extension number where you
want the calls to be sent. You can press CLR to change the
destination back to None.
8. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Changing the number of times the telephone rings before it is
forwarded
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press ÛÜßÝß (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ­. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ­. The display shows Capabilities.
7. Press ­. The display shows Fwd no answer:.
8. Press ­. The display shows Fwd to:nnn.
9. PressÔ. The display shows Forward delay:.
10. Press CHANGE to choose the number of times the telephone
rings before it is forwarded: 2, 3, 4, 6, or 10 rings.
11. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
94 Programming capabilities
Setting Call Forward on Busy
When a call comes in and you are already engaged on the
telephone or when you have Do Not Disturb activated at your
telephone, Call Forward on Busy automatically passes the call to
another extension.
If the extension is a member of a hunt group, the Call Forward on
Busy feature is overridden and the hunt group call will continue
to ring until the hunt time has expired.
A hunt group extension can be a Call Forward on Busy extension.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press ÛÜßÝß (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ­. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ­. The display shows Capabilities.
7. Press ­. The display shows Fwd no answer:.
8. Press Ô. The display shows Fwd on busy.
9. Press ­. The display shows Fwd to:.
10. Press CHANGE and enter the extension number you want to
receive the calls. Press CLR to change the destination back to
None.
11. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Programming Do Not Disturb on Busy
When you are busy on a call and a second call comes in, your
telephone rings softly to alert you to the second call. If you find
this second ring distracting, you can have the system prevent a
second call from ringing by assigning Do Not Disturb (DND) on
Busy to your telephone.
When DND on Busy is turned on for the extension, internal and
private network callers hear a busy tone instead of ringing when
you are on the telephone. External callers are transferred to the
Prime extension used in your system.
If you use DND on Busy, the line indicator for an external
incoming call still flashes, but your telephone does not ring.
Forward on Busy takes priority over DND on Busy.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Programming capabilities 95
If an external call uses a Direct Inward Access (DIA) line, the call
is processed according to the programming of the DIA line. If
there are no available appearances of the DIA line, the caller will
hear a busy tone.
Note: When using DND on busy with the M7100N telephone,
there is no indication that a second call is ringing on your
telephone. Putting your first call on hold automatically
answers the second incoming call.
If the extension is a member of a hunt group, the DND on Busy
feature overrides the hunt group. This extension does not receive
notification of hunt group calls while on a call.
See ‘Do Not Disturb’ on page 214 for information on using this
feature.
Setting and cancelling Do Not Disturb on Busy
You can set or cancel DND on Busy for each extension according
to personal preference.
The default is Y (Yes, DND on Busy is enabled), except for
extension 221.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press ÛÜßÝß (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ­. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ­. The display shows Line access.
7. Press Ô. The display shows Capabilities.
8. Press ­. The display shows Fwd no answer:.
9. Press Ô twice. The display shows DND on busy:.
10. Press CHANGE to choose Y (yes) or N (No).
11. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Programming Handsfree
Norstar telephones allow you to make calls without using the
telephone handset. When Full Handsfree operation is
programmed for a telephone, a Handsfree/Mute key is
automatically assigned to the telephone. Once a telephone has
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
96 Programming capabilities
Full Handsfree, you can also programme Automatic Handsfree.
Automatic Handsfree allows you to make and receive Handsfree
calls without pressing the Handsfree/Mute key.
You can programme the type of Handsfree operation used with
each telephone or activate Handsfree Answerback. See ‘Chart 10:
Extension capabilities 2’ on page 295 in Appendix A for a
programming overview.
See ‘Using Handsfree’ on page 219 for information on using this
feature.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press ÛÜßÝß (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ­. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the extension you wish to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ­ twice.
7. Press Ô until the display shows Handsfree:.
8. Press CHANGE to choose Auto, Std, or None.
9. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Programming Handsfree answerback
Handsfree answerback allows you to answer a call without lifting
the receiver. It is always turned off for an M7100N telephone.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press ÛÜßÝß (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ­. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ­ twice.
7. Press Ô until the display shows HF answerback:.
8. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No).
9. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Programming capabilities 97
Assigning a Pickup group
The Call pickup feature allows you to pick up calls that are
ringing at another extension in your Pickup group.
You can assign extensions into one of four Pickup groups.
Options for this setting are 1 to 4, and None. The default is None.
Extensions can be put into and taken out of any Pickup group. See
‘Answering a telephone using Pickup Group’ on page 221 for
information on using this feature.
A hunt group call ringing at an extension that is a member of a
Pickup group can be picked up by any extension in that call
Pickup group.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press ÛÜßÝß (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ­. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ­ twice. The display shows Fwd no answer.
7. Press Ô until the display shows Pickup grp:.
8. Press CHANGE to assign the telephone to Pickup group 1, 2, 3,
4, or None.
9. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Assigning a page zone
Page zones give you the advantage of paging different parts of the
office without disturbing the entire office. You can assign
extensions to one of three page zones. (A zone is any set of
Norstar extensions that you want to group together for paging,
regardless of their location.) The options for this setting are zones
1, 2, 3, or None (no page zone assigned). The default is page
zone 1.
Members of a hunt group can be included in a page zone.
You can make an extension part of a page zone only if the
extension has paging set to Y (Yes).
Make sure that everyone who needs to make page announcements
has a list showing the extensions that are in each page zone.
See ‘Paging’ on page 245 for information on using this feature.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
98 Programming capabilities
Note: You can make an announcement to one person by placing
a Voice call (Äßß) to that person’s extension.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ÛÜßÝß (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ­. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ­ twice. The display shows Fwd no answer.
7. Press Ô until the display shows Page zone.
8. Press CHANGE to assign page zone 1, 2, 3, or None.
9. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Programming paging
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ÛÜßÝß (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ­. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ­ twice. The display shows Fwd no answer.
7. Press Ô until the display shows Paging:.
8. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No).
9. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Assigning telephones to the Direct-Dial extension
This setting allows you to programme which Direct-Dial
extensions the telephone can call. Direct-Dial extension numbers
and the digits you use to reach Direct-Dial telephones are
programmed in System programming. See ‘Assigning a DirectDial extension’ on page 69.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Programming capabilities 99
Direct-Dial extensions are usually a receptionist for your office or
for a particular department.
You can change which Direct-Dial telephone an extension is
assigned to including none at all. Any number of telephones can
be assigned to call the Direct-Dial telephone.
See ‘Chart 11: Extension capabilities 3’ on page 296 in Appendix
A for a programming overview.
See ‘Accessing a Direct-Dial extension’ on page 242 for
information on using this feature.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ÛÜßÝß (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ­. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The displays shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ­ twice. The display shows Fwd no answer.
7. Press Ô until the display shows D-Dial.
8. Press CHANGE to select Extn1 or None.
9. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Allowing Priority call
If you get a busy signal or a Do Not Disturb message when you
have an urgent call for someone in your office, you can interrupt
their call using the Priority call feature.
By default, telephones are not allowed to make Priority calls. If
you want a telephone to be able to make a Priority call, you must
programme Priority call for that telephone.
A person who receives a Priority call while on another call has 8
seconds to accept or block the call. For information on blocking
calls, see ‘Do Not Disturb’ on page 214. If the person does
nothing, the Priority call feature puts their active call, including
conference parties, on Exclusive Hold and connects your call.
See ‘Making a Priority call’ on page 232 for information on using
this feature.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
100 Programming capabilities
3. Press ÛÜßÝß (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ­. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ­ twice. The display shows Fwd no answer.
7. Press Ô until the display shows Priority call:.
8. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No).
9. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Assigning a Hotline
You can set up a Hotline telephone that automatically calls one
number (internal or external) when you lift the handset or press
the © key. For example, you can have an external
Hotline to your local taxi company for your customers to use.
A hunt group extension number can be specified as a Hotline
telephone.
Label the telephone, telling people that it is a Hotline and what
number it dials so that they do not use it mistakenly.
See ‘Using Hotline’ on page 260 for information on using this
feature.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ÛÜßÝß (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ­. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ­ twice. The display shows Fwd no answer.
7. Press Ô until the display shows Hotline.
8. Press CHANGE to select the type of call the Hotline makes:
None, Intrnl, or Extrnl.
Choosing Internal assigns an extension number.
Choosing External assigns an external number.
If you select an external number:
9. Press ­. The display shows Extrnl#:None.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Programming capabilities 101
10. Press CHANGE.
11. Enter the telephone number as you would dial it. Press OK.
12. Press Ô, then CHANGE to choose Use prime line,
Use line:, Pool code:, or Use routing tabl.
13. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Bypassing a Hotline
Press a line key, or use the Pre-Dial or Automatic Dial feature
before you pick up the handset or press © on a Hotline
telephone. Refer to Telephone Feature Card.
Auxiliary ringer
An auxiliary ringer is a separate external telephone ringer or bell
that must be connected by the installer. The installer programs the
auxiliary ringer to ring for calls on a particular line in
programming. An auxiliary ringer can also be programmed to
ring for a line placed in a Service mode. The extension default for
auxiliary ringer is No.
See ‘Chart 12: Extension capabilities 4’ on page 297 in Appendix
A for a programming overview.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ÛÜßÝß (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ­. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ­ twice. The display shows Fwd no answer.
7. Press Ô until the display shows Aux. ringer.
8. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No).
9. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
To use the auxiliary ringer with Night service, you must
programme under Services.
Activating Redirect ring
As the administrator, you may want to programme the system to
remind people when a line is being redirected. Redirect ring alerts
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
102 Programming capabilities
your extension with a brief ring when a call is redirected on one
of its lines.
See ‘Line redirection’ on page 252 for information on using this
feature.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ÛÜßÝß (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ­. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ­ twice. The display shows Fwd no answer.
7. Press Ô until the display shows Redirect ring:.
8. Press CHANGE to select Y (Yes) or N (No).
9. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
How Line redirection is different from Call Forward
Call Forward forwards all calls that arrive at a particular
telephone to another telephone within the Compact Plus system.
Line redirection redirects only the lines you specify, no matter
which telephones they appear on, to a telephone outside the
Compact Plus system. Line redirection takes precedence over
Call Forward.
Receive tones
Analogue equipment that is connected to the system with an
Analogue Terminal Adapter (external or internal), responds only
to tone dialling signals. If you have analogue equipment
connected to a telephone, set Receive tones for that extension to
Yes. Otherwise, leave Receive tones set to No.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ÛÜßÝß (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ­. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Programming capabilities 103
6. Press ­ twice. The display shows Fwd no answer.
7. Press Ô until the display shows Receive tones.
8. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No).
9. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
104 Programming capabilities
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Programming User preferences
• Programming User preferences.........106
• Changing the key programming for an extension.........106
• Changing a personal (user) speed dial code.........107
• Changing the Call log options.........107
• Changing the dialling options.........108
• Changing the display language.........109
• Changing the display contrast.........109
• Changing the Ring type.........110
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
106 Programming User preferences
Programming User preferences
The User preferences section of programming allows you to
programme memory keys, speed dial codes, and other settings for
any Norstar telephone on the system.
For example, an employee may want to have the Do Not Disturb
feature programmed to a memory key or create a speed dial code.
Instead of programming from that employee’s telephone, you can
enter User preferences on the nearest telephone to make the
change.
See ‘Chart 13: User preferences’ on page 298, for a programming
overview.
You can copy User preferences settings from one extension to
another whenever COPY appears on the display. The only
programming that does not get copied is key programming
between different models of telephone.
Changing the key programming for an extension
If there is one or more key on a particular model of telephone that
you would like to change, you can customise one key at a time.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ­. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ­. The display shows Line access.
7. Press Ô until the display shows User prefernces.
8. Press ­. The display shows Model: followed by a
five-digit code.
9. Press Ô. The display shows Key prgrming.
10. Press ­. The display shows how many keys are on
that model of telephone.
11. Press FIND or press Ô to see a list of key
programming.
12. Press TEL#, FEATR, or CLR to change the programming for any
key.
13. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Programming User preferences 107
Changing a personal (user) speed dial code
See ‘Personal Speed Dial codes’ on page 215 for information on
using this feature.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ÛÜßÝß (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ­. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ­. The display shows Capabilities.
7. Press Ô until the display shows User prefernces.
8. Press ­. The display shows Model: followed by a
five-digit code.
9. Press Ô twice. The display shows User speed
dial.
10. Press ­. The display shows the number of speed
dial codes that are available.
11. Press Ô to see the first speed dial code (71).
12. Press Ô to search through all the speed dial codes.
13. Press ­ when you see the code you want to change.
14. Press CHANGE and enter the telephone number the same way
you would dial it on the telephone.
15. Press OK.
16. Press Ô and choose the line (or enter a code for a
line pool) that the speed dial code should use.
17. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Changing the Call log options
See ‘Call Log’ on page 264 for information on using this feature.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ÛÜßÝß (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
108 Programming User preferences
4. Press ­. The display shows Show extn:#.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ­. The display shows Capabilities.
7. Press Ô until the display shows User prefernces.
8. Press ­. The display shows Model: followed by a
five-digit code.
9. Press Ô until the display shows Call log optÕns.
10. Press ­. The display shows No one answered.
11. Press CHANGE to choose No one answered, Unanswerd by
me, Log all calls, or No autologging.
12. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Changing the dialling options
See ‘Dialling mode’ on page 208 for information on using this
feature.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ÛÜßÝß (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ­. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ­.
7. Press Ô until the display shows User prefernces.
8. Press ­. The display shows Model: followed by a
five-digit code.
9. Press Ô until the display shows Dialling optÕns.
10. Press ­. The display shows Automatic dial.
11. Press CHANGE to choose Automatic dial, Standard, or
Predial.
12. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Programming User preferences 109
Changing the display language
The Norstar system supports a Visually Impaired Operator
Console (VIOC), which provides computer-based speech
synthesis for the programming interface. To use this function, the
display language needs to be set to Operating.
See ‘Visually Impaired Operator Console’ on page 202 for
information on using this feature.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ÛÜßÝß (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ­. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ­. The display shows Capabilities.
7. Press Ô until the display shows User prefernces.
8. Press ­. The display shows Model: followed by a
five-digit code.
9. Press Ô until the display shows Language:.
10. Press CHANGE to choose English or Opratng.
11. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Changing the display contrast
Display contrast allows you to lighten or darken the telephone
display to suit the lighting conditions in your office.
See ‘Display contrast’ on page 209 for information on using this
feature.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ÛÜßÝß (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ­. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The display show nnn:nnn.
6. Press ­. The display shows Capabilities.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
110 Programming User preferences
7. Press Ô until the display shows User prefernces.
8. Press ­. The display shows Model: followed by a
five-digit code.
9. Press Ô until the display shows Display cntrst:.
10. Press CHANGE to choose 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9.
11. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Note: You do not see any change in the display of the telephone
you are using when you are programming User
preferences from another telephone.
Changing the Ring type
See ‘Ring type’ on page 210 for information on using this feature.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ÛÜßÝß (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ­. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ­. The display shows Capabilities.
7. Press Ô until the display shows User prefernces.
8. Press ­. The display shows Model: followed by a
five-digit code.
9. Press Ô until the display shows Ring type:.
10. Press CHANGE to choose 1, 2, 3, or 4.
11. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Programming Hunt groups
• Adding or removing members from a group.........113
• Programming Hunt groups.........111
• Moving members of a group.........113
• Assigning or unassigning lines to a group.........114
• Setting the distribution mode.........115
• Setting the hunt delay.........116
• Programming options if all hunt members are busy.........116
• Programming the queue timeout.........117
• Programming the overflow extension.........118
• Setting the name.........118
• Checking hunt group metrics.........119
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
112 Programming Hunt groups
Programming Hunt Groups
Establish hunt groups in your system to allow incoming calls to
reach a group of extensions. The hunt groups feature allows you
to call a group of extensions with a single directory number.
Hunt groups are used in situations where a group of people
performing the same task are required to answer a number of
related telephone queries. Some typical uses of hunt groups are:
• a sales department answering questions on product prices,
availability etc.
• a support department answering questions concerning the
operation of a product
• an emergency department answering calls for help
A company with support services for different products may want
to have a hunt group dedicated to each product. Support
personnel handling Product A can be in one group, and support
personnel handling Product B can be in another group. Incoming
calls look for the next available extension in the group. If no
extension is available, the hunt groups feature places the call in a
queue or routes it to an overflow extension.
Under the hunt groups sub-heading, you programme:
• members of a group
• member position in a group
• the lines assigned to a group
• the distribution of incoming calls
• the length of time the system looks for available agents before
sending the call to the overflow position
• how the system handles calls if all agents are busy
Note: Do not programme videophones as members of a hunt
group. Hunt groups allow one B channel connection at a
time and videophones use two B channels.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Programming Hunt groups 113
Adding or removing members from a group
Compact Plus supports 6 groups with a maximum of 60 members
system-wide. Members of the group can be any Norstar
extension, DNA, or ISDN extension. An extension can be in
multiple hunt groups but each occurrence increases the total
number of members in the system.
There can be one appearance of the same hunt group on a set.
The extension number range for hunt groups is 315 to 320. The
extension numbers in this range cannot be members of a hunt
group.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ­. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ­. The display shows Show group:.
7. Enter the hunt group number (1-6) you want to programme.
8. Press ­. The display shows Member extns.
9. Press ­. The display shows the members for that
group.
10. Press ADD to add a member or press REMOVE to remove a
member from the group.
11. To program the extension appearance, press ­. The
display shows Appr&Ring.
12. Press CHANGE to select Appr only, Appr&Ring or Ring only.
13. Press ¨ to exit or Ôto continue programming.
Moving members of a group
Member order within a hunt group is important. The member
order determines how a call is routed through a hunt group.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
114 Programming Hunt groups
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ­. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ­. The display shows Show group:.
7. Enter the hunt group number you want to programme (1 to 6).
8. Press ­. The display shows Member extns.
9. Press ­. The display shows the members for that
group.
10. Press MOVE to move an existing member to another place
within the hunt group. The display shows the member number
followed by an arrow.
11. Enter the new position number for the extension.
12. Press ¨ to exit or Ôto continue programming.
Assigning or unassigning lines to a group
It is recommended to set the hunt group’s line Prime extension to
None. Doing so prevents delayed ring transfer of external hunt
group calls to the Prime extension before the hunt group can
receive the call.
You can assign a line to only one group.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ­. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ­. The display shows Show group:.
7. Enter the Hunt Group number you want to programme (1-6).
8. Press ­. The display shows Member extns:.
9. Press Ô. The display shows Line assignment.
10. Press ­. The display shows Show line:.
11. Enter the line number you want to program, press SCAN to go
the first line assigned to this group or press LIST to go to the
first line in the system.
12. Press CHANGE to programme the line as Unassigned or
Assigned.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Programming Hunt groups 115
*HGnn* means the line is assigned to another hunt group.
13. Press ¨ to exit or Ôto continue programming.
Setting the distribution mode
There are three distribution settings.
• Broadcast—rings each extension in the group simultaneously.
The system handles calls one at a time, routing other calls
according to the routing option selected in the If busy setting
(see ‘Programming options if all hunt members are busy’ on
page 116). When a call is answered, the next call in the queue
is presented to the hunt group.
In Broadcast mode, a single incoming call will ring
simultaneously at all the extensions in a group. This way, all
receptionists in the group can share the load of answering large
volumes of calls. An example is a fund-raising campaign
where a group of operators wait to take each call as it comes in.
• Sequential—starts the call at the first extension in the hunt
group. Distribution is complete when the system finds the first
free extension. This distribution method allows the system to
present simultaneous calls to the hunt group. Distribution is
order-based.
In Sequential mode, you can programme your top salesperson
to be the first member of the group to receive incoming calls.
• Cyclic—distribution begins with the member following the
last extension to receive a hunt group call. Distribution is
complete when the system finds the first free extension. This
distribution method allows the system to present simultaneous
calls to the hunt group. Distribution is order-based.
Using Cyclic mode, you ensure that your helpline personnel
receive calls in an evenly distributed method.
If a call goes unanswered and the hunt group has available agents,
the system routes the call through the member list until someone
answers the call or the queue time-out occurs. If a queue timeout
occurs, the system routes the call to the overflow position.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ­. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ­. The display shows Show group:.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
116 Programming Hunt groups
7. Enter the hunt group number you want to programme (1-6).
8. Press ­. The display shows Member extns.
9. Press Ô until the display shows Mode:.
10. Press CHANGE to set the mode: Sequential, Cyclic, Broadcast.
11. Press ¨ to exit or Ôto continue programming.
Setting the hunt delay
You can programme the number of ring cycles the system allows
at a hunt group extension before moving to the next hunt group
extension.
You can estimate the delay in seconds by multiplying the number
of rings by six.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ­. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ­. The display shows Show group:.
7. Enter the hunt group number you want to programme (1-6).
8. Press ­. The display shows Member extns.
9. Press Ô until the display shows Hunt delay:.
10. Press CHANGE to select the setting: 1,2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10.
11. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Programming options if all hunt members are busy
There are three routing options if all agents are busy:
• BusyTone—the caller gets a busy tone
• Overflow—the call routes to the hunt group overflow position
• Queue—the call stays in the system for the period of time
programmed in Q timeout. Within this period of time, the call
presents to an agent if one becomes available. When time-out
occurs, the call routes to the hunt group overflow position.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Programming Hunt groups 117
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ­. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ­. The display shows Show group:.
7. Enter the hunt group number you want to programme (1-6).
8. Press ­. The display shows Member extns.
9. Press Ô until the display shows If busy:.
10. Press CHANGE to set the mode: BusyTone, Overflow, Queue.
11. Press ¨ to exit or Ôto continue programming.
Programming the queue timeout
This setting allows you to programme the number of seconds a
call will remain in the hunt group queue before it is also routed to
the overflow position.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ­. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ­. The display shows Show group:.
7. Enter the hunt group number you want to programme (1-6).
8. Press ­. The display shows Member extns.
9. Press Ô until the display shows Q Timeout:.
10. Press CHANGE to set the queue timeout: 15, 30, 45, 60, 120 or
180.
11. Press ¨ to exit or Ôto continue programming.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
118 Programming Hunt groups
Programming the overflow extension
You can programme which extension receives overflow calls. If
the overflow extension is a hunt group extension, the call is
considered a new call and joins the queue.
The overflow extension can be an extension number associated
with a voice mailbox.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ­. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ­. The display shows Show group:.
7. Enter the hunt group number you want to programme (1-6).
8. Press ­. The display shows Member extns.
9. Press Ô until the display shows Overflow:.
10. Press ­. The display shows Overflow:HGn.
11. Press CHANGE to change the overflow position.
12. Enter the new overflow position.
13. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Setting the name
You can programme the hunt group name, such as SERVICE or
SALES. The name can be up to seven characters in length.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ­. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ­. The display shows Show group:.
7. Enter the hunt group number you want to programme (1-6).
8. Press ­. The display shows Member extns.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Programming Hunt groups 119
9. Press Ô until the display shows Name:.
10. Press CHANGE.
11. Using the keypad, enter the name of the hunt group.
12. Press Ô to store the name.
13. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Checking hunt group metrics
This feature provides you with hunt group call information.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows Usage Metrics.
5. Press ­. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ­. The display shows Show group:.
7. Enter the number of the hunt group you wish to view. The
display shows HG<n> metrics.
8. Press ­. The display shows the date the information
was last cleared.
9. Press Ô. The display shows TotalCalls:.
The value shown is the total number of calls received by the
hunt group, to a maximum of 99999.
10. Press Ô. The display shows Ans:.
The values shown are the total number of calls that were
answered and the percentage of answered calls to total calls.
11. Press Ô. The display shows Avg ans: _sec.
The value shown is the average time in seconds that it took to
answer a call, to a maximum of 999.
12. Press Ô. The display shows Abndn:.
The values shown are the number of abandoned calls and the
percentage of abandoned calls to total calls.
13. Press Ô. The display shows Busy:.
The values shown are the number of times the hunt group was
busy and the percentage of busy calls to total calls.
14. Press Ô. The display shows Overfl:.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
120 Programming Hunt groups
The values shown are the number of calls sent to the overflow
position and the percentage of overflow calls to total calls.
15. Press Ô. The display shows Avg Q:_sec.
The value shown is the average time, in seconds, the call
waited in the queue, to a maximum of 999.
16. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Programming feature settings
• Background music.........122
• On hold.........122
• Receiver volume.........123
• Camp timeout.........123
• Park timeout.........124
• Park mode.........124
• Transfer callback.........125
• Network callback.........126
• Conference tone.........127
• Directed (call) pickup.........128
• Page tone.........128
• Page timeout.........129
• Call log space.........129
• Alarm extension.........130
• Answer extension.........131
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
122 Programming feature settings
Background music
This feature allows people to listen to music through their
telephone speakers, providing an external music source has been
installed. The default is No, which means that Background music
is disabled.
See ‘Background music’ on page 214 for information on using
this feature.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ­. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press Ô until the display shows Featr settings.
7. Press ­. The display shows Backgrnd music:.
8. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No).
9. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
On hold
You can choose what a caller hears when the call has been put on
hold.
Note: In systems networked with private circuits, it is a good
idea to have callers hear tones on all systems on the private
network. Otherwise, callers who are transferred across the
private network may hear a confusing variety of music,
tones, and silence.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ­. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press Ô until the display shows Featr settings.
7. Press ­. The display shows Backgrnd music:.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Programming feature settings 123
8. Press Ô until the display shows On hold:.
9. Press CHANGE to choose Tones, Music, or Silence.
10. Press ¨ to exit or Ôto continue programming.
Receiver volume
Receiver volume allows you to specify whether the volume level
of a receiver or headset returns to the system default level when
a call is ended or put on hold, or whether it remains at the level
set at the individual telephone.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ­. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press Ô until the display shows Featr settings.
7. Press ­. The display shows Backgrnd music:.
8. Press Ô until the display shows Receiver volume.
9. Press ­ and use CHANGE to choose Use sys volume
or Use extn volume.
10. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Camp timeout
You can send an external call to another extension, even though
all its lines are busy, using the Camp-on feature. It is useful for
people who process many calls, such as secretaries or
receptionists. Camp timeout specifies the number of seconds
before an unanswered call returns to the telephone that camped
the call.
See ‘Transferring to a busy extension (Call Camping)’ on
page 233 for information on using this feature.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
124 Programming feature settings
4. Press Ô until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ­. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press Ô until the display shows Featr settings.
7. Press ­. The display shows Backgrnd music.
8. Press Ô until the display shows Camp time-out:.
9. Press CHANGE to choose 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 150, or 180
seconds.
10. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Park timeout
The Call Parking feature allows you to place a call on hold and
assign it a code so it can be retrieved from any telephone in the
Compact Plus system. Park timeout specifies the number of
seconds before an unanswered call returns to the extension that
parked the call.
See ‘Call Parking’ on page 230 for information on using this
feature.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ­. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press Ô until the display shows Featr settings.
7. Press ­. The display shows Backgrnd music.
8. Press Ô until the display shows Park time-out:.
9. Press CHANGE to choose 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180, 300 or
600 seconds.
10. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Park mode
Park mode lets you suspend a call, and lets someone retrieve the
call by entering a retrieval code at any Norstar extension in the
system.
The Park mode retrieval code is a three-digit number. By default,
the first digit of that number is 1, with the possible retrieval codes
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Programming feature settings 125
ranging from 101 to 109. You can now programme the system to
assign retrieval codes.
Lowest—Norstar assigns the lowest available retrieval code. If
there is only one parked call on the system, the number is 101. If
there are three calls, they are assigned 101, 102, and 103.
Cycle—Norstar assigns the next available retrieval code in the
sequence (101 to 109). If the last parked call was assigned 106,
then the next one is assigned 107. If the last retrieval code was
109, then the next code is 101.
See ‘Call Parking’ on page 230 for information on using this
feature.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ­. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press Ô until the display shows Featr settings.
7. Press ­. The display shows Backgrnd music.
8. Press Ô until the display shows Park Mode:.
9. Press CHANGE to choose Lowest or Cycle.
10. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Transfer callback
After a specified number of rings, an unanswered transferred call
returns to the extension that made the transfer. Transfer callback
specifies the number of rings before the call is returned. You can
estimate the delay in seconds if you multiply the number of rings
by three.
See ‘Transferring a call’ on page 233 for information on the
Transfer feature.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows System prgrming.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
126 Programming feature settings
5. Press ­. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press Ô until the display shows Featr settings.
7. Press ­. The display shows Backgrnd music.
8. Press Ô until the display shows Trnsfr callbk:.
9. Press CHANGE to choose 3, 4, 5, 6, or 12 rings.
10. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Network callback
If you transfer a call to a private network destination and the call
is not answered, it comes back to you after a specified time.
Network callback defines the time, in seconds, before a call is
returned to your extension.
Since the time required to transfer a call across the private
network varies depending on the complexity of your private
network, you may need to experiment to achieve the correct
setting.
Note: Depending on how a private network call is routed, it may
not always be possible for the system to return a
transferred call.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ­. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press Ô until the display shows Featr settings.
7. Press ­. The display shows Backgrnd music.
8. Press Ô until the display shows Netwk callbk:.
9. Press CHANGE to choose 15, 30, 45, 60, or 90 seconds.
10. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Held line reminder and delay
A reminder tone and display message occur at a Norstar
telephone when a call has been placed on hold for a certain period
of time. The display continues to show the name of the held line
until the call is dealt with. In the case of multiple calls on hold,
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Programming feature settings 127
the display shows the name of the line that has been held the
longest. Once that call has been dealt with, the display shows the
number of the next longest held call.
You can switch Held line reminder on or off and set the time
before the reminder takes effect.
The Held line reminder emits a double periodic tone. This tone
distinguishes the feature from the Call Waiting tone, which uses
a single periodic tone.
See ‘Holding’ on page 226 for information on this feature.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ­. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press Ô until the display shows Featr settings.
7. Press ­. The display shows Backgrnd music.
8. Press Ô until the display shows Held reminder:.
9. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No).
10. Press Ô. The display shows Remind delay:.
11. Press CHANGE to choose 30, 60, 90, 120, 150, or 180 seconds.
12. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Conference tone
This tone may be heard by all parties as soon as a three-way call
is established using the Conference or Privacy feature. You can
turn Conference tones on and off for the whole system.
See ‘Making a conference call’ on page 237 for information on
using the Conference feature.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ­. The display shows Hunt groups.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
128 Programming feature settings
6. Press Ô until the display shows Featr settings.
7. Press ­. The display shows Backgrnd music.
8. Press Ô until the display shows Confrence tone:.
9. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No).
10. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Directed (call) pickup
The Directed pickup feature allows someone to pick up calls that
are ringing at another telephone by entering Äàß
and the extension number. You can enable or disable Directed
pickup for the system. The default is Yes, which means that
Directed pickup is enabled.
See ‘Answering a telephone using Directed Pickup’ on page 221
for information on using this feature.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ­. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press Ô until the display shows Featr settings.
7. Press ­. The display shows Backgrnd music.
8. Press Ô until the display shows Directd pickup:.
9. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No).
10. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Page tone
You can choose whether a tone sounds before a page begins.
See ‘Paging’ on page 245 for information on using the Paging
feature.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Programming feature settings 129
4. Press Ô until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ­. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press Ô until the display shows Featr settings.
7. Press ­. The display shows Backgrnd music.
8. Press Ô until the display shows Page tone:.
9. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No).
10. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Page timeout
The Paging feature is automatically disconnected after a specified
length of time.
See ‘Paging’ on page 245 for information on using the Paging
feature.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ­. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press Ô until the display shows Featr settings.
7. Press ­. The display shows Backgrnd music.
8. Press Ô until the display shows Page timeout:.
9. Press CHANGE to choose 15, 30, 60, 120, 180, 300, 600, 2700
seconds.
10. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Call log space
Call log space customises how log space is allocated to
telephones in the system. Resetting all logs allows you to
reallocate the Call log space equally to all telephones in your
system.
Use this heading only if you want to allocate an equal amount of
log space to all the telephones in your system. There are 250 Call
log spaces available in the system. There are no spaces allocated
by default. Changing the space allocation using log defaults
defines the log space available to all telephones in the system.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
130 Programming feature settings
Any remaining unassigned log space is available in a log pool,
and can be reallocated under Terminals&Extns.
Reallocating Call log space may destroy call log data at
telephones that lose space.
See ‘Call Log’ on page 264 for information on using the Call log
feature.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ­. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press Ô until the display shows Featr settings.
7. Press ­. The display shows Backgrnd music.
8. Press Ô until the display shows Call log space.
9. Press ­. The display shows Reset all logs?.
10. Press YES and use the key pad to enter the space allocation for
the call log at each extension. You must use a three-digit
number (for example, 020 to give each extension 20 spaces).
11. Press YES to accept the settings and end programming. The
system automatically reallocates log space. Press NO to reset
the number of spaces allocated to each log.
Alarm extension
An Alarm telephone displays system alarm codes, should they
occur. You can determine which telephone receives the alarms.
The default is extension 221.
The Alarm telephone must have a
two-line display.
The Alarm telephone must be an M7310N or
M7324N telephone.
See ‘Recording and reporting alarm codes’ on page 192 for
information on the alarm codes.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Programming feature settings 131
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ­. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press Ô until the display shows Featr settings.
7. Press ­. The display shows Backgrnd music.
8. Press Ô until the display shows AlarmExtn:.
9. Press CHANGE.
10. Enter the extension number or press CLR to set the Alarm
telephone to None.
11. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Answer extension
The Answer extns setting in Terminals&Extns programming lets
you assign Answer extension numbers to a telephone. The
Answer extn setting in Featr settings programming lets you
determine what types of calls will alert at the telephone. Your
choices are: basic, Enhanced, and Extended.
Basic permits the same call coverage allowed in Compact Plus
Release 1. Enhanced permits the same call coverage as Compact
Plus Release 1 as well as overflow call routing calls but will not
permit blind transferred calls. Extended permits all call types
except priority calls, voice calls and other Answer key calls to
alert at the telephone.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ­. The display shows Hunt Groups.
6. Press Ô until the display shows Featr settings.
7. Press ­. The display shows Backgrnd music:.
8. Press Ô until the display shows Ans. extn:.
9. Press CHANGE to select the settings: Basic, Enhanced, and
Extended.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
132 Programming feature settings
10. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Moving and copying
• Extension relocation.........134
• Copying programming for telephones.........135
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
134 Moving and copying
Extension relocation
The Extension relocation feature lets you move a telephone from
one extension socket to another without losing any of its custom
programming or its assigned extension number. By default
Extension relocation is set to No.
Wait one minute between moves.
After moving a telephone, wait one minute
before moving the telephone a second time or
changing the telephone’s extension number.
The CCU may take up to sixty seconds to
recognise a telephone moved to a new
location.
Do not connect another telephone to
the old socket before relocating the
telephone.
When moving a telephone with Extension
relocation turned on, do not connect another
telephone to the extension socket of the
telephone you are moving before connecting
that telephone to a new extension socket.
If you connect a telephone of the same type to
the vacated extension socket, that telephone
receives the programming of the original
telephone.
If you connect a telephone of a different type
to the vacated extension socket, that
telephone receives default programming and
the original telephone’s programming is lost.
Note: Turn Extension relocation to No after the telephone
installation and programming are completed, rather than
before. This provides you with more flexibility in testing
equipment. If Extension relocation is set to No while a
telephone is moved, that telephone’s extension number
and data remain with the physical port on the Central
Control Unit (CCU); the telephone does not receive the
original programming when it is reconnected elsewhere.
Remember to record any programming changes in the
Programming Record.
See ‘Chart 14: Extension relocation’ on page 299 in Appendix A,
for a programming overview.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Moving and copying 135
Relocate to extension jacks that are configured
for telephones.
When moving extensions from one jack to
another, ensure that all jacks support a Norstar
telephone. If a fax machine, Analogue Terminal
Adapter, analogue telephone, or modem was
plugged into the jack, do not plug a Norstar
telephone into the jack.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ­. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press Ô until the display shows Featr settings.
7. Press ­. The display shows Backgrnd music.
8. Press Ô until the display shows Extn relocatn:.
9. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No).
10. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Copying programming for telephones
During programming, you can copy certain programmed settings
from one line to another, or from one telephone to another using
the COPY key when it appears on the display. You can copy either
system programming, or system programming and personal
programming.
Personal programming includes the settings programmed by
people at their own telephones using feature codes. You can only
copy personal programming between telephones of the same type
when both are plugged into the system.
See ‘Chart 15: Copying settings’ on page 299 in Appendix A for
a programming overview.
Copying system programming to a single extension
Pressing the COPY softkey allows you to copy programming from
one extension to another extension, to a range of extensions, or to
all extensions in the system.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
136 Moving and copying
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ­ and enter the extension number whose
programming you want to copy.
5. Press COPY. The display shows Copy:SYSTEM data.
6. Press CHANGE to toggle between SYSTEM data (to copy the
programming of the system) and SYSTEM+USER (to copy the
programming of the system and the programming of a
particular extension).
7. Press Ô. The display shows Copy:SINGLE.
8. Press Ô. The display shows Copy to:.
9. Enter the extension number of the extension that will be
programmed. The display shows nnn>nnn briefly, then
returns to Copy to:.
10. Keep entering extension numbers if you have other single
extensions that you wish to programme.
11. Press CANCL when you are finished.
Copying system programming to a range of extensions
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ­ and enter the extension number whose
programming you want to copy.
5. Press COPY. The display shows Copy:SYSTEM data.
6. Press CHANGE to toggle between SYSTEM data (to copy the
programming of the system) and SYSTEM+USER (to copy the
programming of the system and the programming of a
particular extension).
7. Press Ô. The display shows Copy:SINGLE.
8. Press CHANGE to select either a range of extensions or all
extensions.
9. Press Ô. The display shows Only equippd Ext.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Moving and copying 137
10. Press CHANGE to switch between equipped extensions and all
extensions.
11. Press Ô. The display shows Begin at:.
12. Enter the starting extension number. The display shows
End at:.
13. Enter the ending extension number. The display shows
nnn>nnn-nnn?.
14. Press OK to copy the programming to the specified extensions.
Depending on the activities going on in the system, a copy may
not take effect for a while. The brief display you see once you
have finished a copying session does not indicate the process is
complete.
You can leave the programming session even if the copy has not
been completed. If you exit programming, copying continues
uninterrupted until it is complete.
Event codes capture both the start and completion of the copying
process.
System settings you can copy
• line assignment
• line pool access
• Prime line designation
• number of intercom keys
• settings programmed under the heading Capabilities
Personal settings you can copy
• the personal programming for dialling modes
• line key positions
• personal speed dial entries
• automatic delivery of call information for outgoing calls
• log settings
• programmed memory keys
Settings you cannot copy
• extension number and name
• log password
• Direct-Dial and Extra-Dial extension designations
• Service mode Control extension designation for a line
• Service mode Ringing extension designation for a line
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
138 Moving and copying
• Prime extension designation for a line, or private line
appearances
• personal programming for display contrast, ring type, and ring
volume
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Settings for analogue equipment
• Settings for analogue equipment.........140
• Setting the delay before the ATA/I-ATA answers.........140
• Changing the dial mode of an ATA or an I-ATA.........141
• Setting whether the ATA/I-ATA should receive system tones.........142
• Setting whether an ATA is used on-site or off-site.........142
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
140 Settings for analogue equipment
Settings for analogue equipment
Analogue equipment includes answering and fax machines as
well as analogue telephones. Analogue equipment is connected to
the Compact Plus system through the Integrated Analogue
Terminal Adapter (I-ATA) or with an external Analogue Terminal
Adapter (ATA). An external ATA responds only to incoming tone
dialling signals.
The ATA and I-ATA allow analogue telephones to access some
Norstar features such as Call Forward, Conference, Transfer, and
Last Number Redial. Telephones connected to the ATA or I-ATA
cannot display the time and date. For information on using
Norstar features from an external analogue telephone connected
to an ATA, refer to Analogue Terminal Adapter User Card.
You can adjust the following settings:
• change the number of rings the analogue equipment waits
before answering a call
• change the extension used for analogue equipment to receive
tone dialling signals
• set whether an external ATA is required and whether it is used
on-site or off-site
• change the Dial mode for outgoing data of an external ATA to
either tone or pulse
• set whether the ATA should receive confirmation and error
tones (only for analogue telephones)
Setting the delay before the ATA/I-ATA answers
To accommodate the device connected to the ATA, you may want
to lengthen or shorten the delay before the device is able to
receive tones. For example, a modem or fax machine requires
only a short delay.
Refer to ATA Terminal Feature Card for information on using the
ATA features.
See "Chart 16: ATA settings" on page 300 in Appendix A for a
programming overview.
The ATA answer timer controls this delay. The default setting is
a 7 second delay before the speech path is connected.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Settings for analogue equipment 141
4. Press ­. The display show Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ­. The display shows Line access.
7. Press Ô. The display shows Capabilities.
8. Press ­. The display shows Fwd no answer.
9. Press Ô until the display shows ATA settings.
10. Press ­. The display shows ATA ans timer:.
11. Press CHANGE to choose 3, 5, 7, or 10 seconds.
12. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Changing the dial mode of an ATA or an I-ATA
You must tell the system whether the device connected to the
ATA sends out pulse or Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMF)
signals.
The default signal is tone.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ­. The display show Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme.
6. Press ­. The display shows Line access.
7. Press Ô. The display shows Capabilities.
8. Press ­. The display shows Fwd no answer.
9. Press Ô until the display shows ATA settings.
10. Press ­. The display shows ATA ans timer:.
11. Press Ô. The display shows ATA mode:.
12. Press CHANGE to choose Tone or Pulse.
13. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
142 Settings for analogue equipment
Setting whether the ATA/I-ATA should receive system tones
You must tell the system whether the device connected to the
ATA should receive confirmation and error tones. These tones
inform a person of call progress, but confuse a modem or fax
machine.
• If the ATA is connected to a telephone, set tones to Y.
• If the ATA is connected to any other device, set tones to N.
The default is No.
Note: This setting does not interfere with intrusion and
conference tones on a telephone connected to an ATA.
These tones are heard through the telephone handset
regardless of the ATA tones setting.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ­. The display show Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ­. The display shows Line access.
7. Press Ô. The display shows Capabilities.
8. Press ­. The display shows Fwd no answer.
9. Press Ô until the display shows ATA settings.
10. Press ­. The display shows ATA ans timer:.
11. Press Ô until the display shows ATA tones:.
12. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No).
13. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Setting whether an ATA is used on-site or off-site
The external ATA can connect Compact Plus to analogue
telephones, modems, or answering machines that are either on
your premises or at another location. When you want to connect
extensions at some other location to your system, specify off-site.
The default is on-site.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Settings for analogue equipment 143
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ­. The display show Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ­. The display shows Line access.
7. Press Ô. The display shows Capabilities.
8. Press ­. The display shows Fwd no answer.
9. Press Ô until the display shows ATA settings.
10. Press ­. The display shows ATA ans timer:.
11. Press Ô until the display shows ATA use:.
12. Press CHANGE to choose On-site or Off-site.
13. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
144 Settings for analogue equipment
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Services
• Using alternate or scheduled services.........146
• Turning services on or off.........146
• Designating alternate routes for calls.........148
• Programming routes.........151
• Programming destination codes.........152
• Turning a manual service on or off with a feature code.........155
• Assigning control extensions.........155
• Changing the name of a schedule.........157
• Changing the time of a schedule.........157
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
146 Services
Using alternate or scheduled services
Your Compact Plus system is set up to handle calls during normal
business hours. However, you may wish to handle incoming calls
differently at lunch time, in the evening, at night, or during
holidays.
To accommodate changes, Compact Plus provides services that
let you customise the way calls are handled at different times of
the day. Besides a Normal schedule, there are six additional
schedules. Three of the schedules are already named: Lunch,
Evening, and Night. You can assign new names for these modes
and assign names to the three unnamed schedules.
When Ringing service and Restriction service are set to manual,
a control extension is used to place the extensions and exchange
lines that it controls into and out of service schedules. A control
extension can be assigned to control either lines or extensions, or
both lines and extensions.
A service schedule activates three aspects of how the system
operates: Ringing, Restriction, and Routing.
• You can customise the Ringing service so that
— an extra extension rings for calls placed to the Direct-Dial
extension
— additional extensions ring for incoming calls
— an auxiliary ringer notifies when a line rings
• You can bar long-distance calls by applying Restriction
service to a line or extension in a service schedule.
• You can take advantage of alternate route selection by
assigning different routes to be used during the different
schedules.
Turning services on or off
Ringing service
You can have Ringing service set up to run differently for each of
the six schedules. You may decide you want Ringing service for
the Night schedule to come into effect only when it is turned on
and off manually.
If you manually call on a service, it remains in effect until you
cancel it, regardless of any automatic modes scheduled. Manual
service also overrides any automatic mode that is active.
If you programme a service as Manual, you must use the control
extension to turn the service on using a feature code. The default
control extension for all lines and extensions is 221.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Services 147
See "Chart 17: Ringing service" on page 301 in Appendix A for
a programming overview.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô twice. The display shows Services.
5. Press ­. The display shows Ringing service.
6. Press ­. The display shows Ringing groups.
7. Press Ô until the display shows Sched:Night.
8. Press ­. The display shows Service:.
9. Press CHANGE to choose Manual, Auto, or Off.
10. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Add extensions for Ringing service
You can add lines within groups to ring for these services on
different extensions. For example, you might want the ring to be
heard at two locations for ease of access. To add an extension:
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô twice. The display shows Services.
5. Press ­. The display shows Ringing service.
6. Press ­. The display shows Ringing groups.
7. Press ­. The display shows Ring grp: 001.
8. Press Ô to cycle through the ring groups until you
find the one you want (from 001 to 100). Or, enter the number
directly on the keypad.
9. Press ­. The display shows Show extn#:.
10. Press Ô to cycle through the extensions available, or
enter the number directly on the keypad. The extension
currently assigned to Ringing service will display Assigned.
11. Press CHANGE to assign another extension to ringing service.
12. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue in programming.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
148 Services
Deleting extensions from ringing service
To delete an extension from Ringing service, follow the same
steps as for adding. The final CHANGE step will Unassign the
extension.
Restriction service
Assigning restriction filters to schedules gives you control over
calls made outside of normal business hours. For example, you
may allow long-distance calls during the day but bar them in the
evening (using the Night schedule) and on weekends (using
Schedule 5, which you may have renamed Weekend schedule).
See "Chart 18: Restriction service" on page 301 in Appendix A
for a programming overview.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô twice. The display shows Services.
5. Press ­. The display shows Ringing service.
6. Press Ô. The display shows Restrn service.
7. Press ­. The display shows Sched:Night.
8. Press ­ and use CHANGE to choose Manual, Auto, or
Off.
9. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Routing service
Instead of having to manually decide which routes to use at
different times of the day, you can set the routes to automatically
be selected according to the programmed settings for each of the
six schedules.
Designating alternate routes for calls
The programming for Routing service decides what path an
outgoing call takes using the digits that are dialed.
When you select an internal line and dial, the numbers you enter
are checked against the routes. If the number you dialled starts
with a destination code, the system uses the line pool and dials out
digits specified by the route assigned to that destination code, and
then dials the number that you dialled.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Services 149
Routing service replaces a number of tasks that otherwise have to
be done manually, including
• entering a line pool code
• dialling an access code for a long-distance carrier
• accessing an alternate route if the Prime line is busy or
unavailable
Uniform numbering plan
Compact Plus can be programmed to provide dialling
transparency by using a uniform numbering plan. For example, a
worker at the head office in London can call a colleague at a
branch office in Birmingham as though they were calling an
extension in their own office.
Dialling transparency depends on establishing a numbering plan
where all extension numbers are unique and of a uniform length.
For example, if you have three company sites (two in London and
one in Birmingham), then all three sites should have the same
number of digits in their extension numbers, and each extension
number should be unique.
When performing System Start-up, you can change the starting
value and length of extension numbers as well as the Received
number length. If you apply the PBX template at System Start-up,
received numbers and the Received number length are set
automatically to match the extension numbers.
How Routing service works
There are two headings for Routing service: Routes and
Dest codes. Under Routes, you programme DialOut and Use.
• Dial Out—specifies the digits (up to 24) to be dialled out to
reach the called extension.
• Use—defines a specific line pool to be used to make the call.
Under Dest codes, you programme the destination route and
AbsorbLength.
• Normal—is for assigning the route code to be used during
regular business hours.
• Absorb Length—indicates how many of the digits in the
destination code should be absorbed by the system (not dialled
out to reach the called extension).
When a caller dials a number, Compact Plus checks the leading
digits of the number against the destination codes. If the leading
digits are matched to a destination code, Compact Plus proceeds
to select the route containing the appropriate line pool and
dial-out digits. It then adds the digits that the caller dialled (minus
the ones that are to be absorbed from the destination code).
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
150 Services
In the following example, a caller at extension 6625 in London
wants to reach a colleague in Maidenhead. Without the Routing
service, the caller would have to select a line and dial
01628 784221 to reach extension 4221 in Maidenhead.
Because the system has an appropriate route and destination
code, the caller simply dials 4221. The system recognises 4 as a
destination code. It checks destination code 4, which instructs it
to use Dial Out 01628 78 and Line Pool A from Route 002. It is
instructed not to absorb any digits from the destination code, so it
adds all of the caller’s digits (4221) to complete the call.
Example
of a simple route
London
Maidenhead
Extn 6625
Extn 4221
(dialled digits 4221)
Line pool A
(dialled digits 01628 784221)
Routing service settings
Routes (Route 002)
DialOut:
01628 78
Use:
Pool A
Dest codes (DstCode 4)
Normal:
002
AbsorbLength: 0
Specifying the type of line to be used
Each route lets you programme the line pool, and thus the type of
line to be used as the outgoing facility to reach a destination. For
example, if ISDN lines have been placed in Line Pool B,
specifying pool B as the line pool to use in a route for a particular
destination code ensures that all calls being routed to that
destination use ISDN lines.
You must ensure that extensions and ISDN terminals have access
to the line pools that they need to make calls (programmed under
Line Access in Lines).
See "Chart 19: Routing service" on page 302 in Appendix A for
a programming overview.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Services 151
Programming routes
Dial Out
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. PressÄ¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows Services.
5. Press ­. The display shows Ringing service.
6. Press Ô until the display shows Routing service.
7. Press ­. The display shows Routes.
8. Press ­. The display shows Show route:.
9. Enter a three-digit route code or press Ô.
10. Press ­. The display shows DialOut:.
11. Press CHANGE.
12. Enter the Dial Out digits (up to 24) or press CANCL to choose
No number.
You can press Äà¡ to insert a 1.5-second pause
in the dialling string, if necessary.
Route 000 shows no DialOut:No numbr by default and
cannot be changed.
13. Press OK.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
152 Services
Use Pool
1. Begin with DialOut: (step 10 of previous procedure).
2. Press Ô. The display shows Use:
3. Press CHANGE to Pool A, Pool B, or Pool C.
Route 000 uses Pool A by default and cannot be changed.
Programming destination codes
Dest code
When programming destination codes, you can use wild cards in
the destination code string. As a result of wild card characters, the
number of destination codes programmed in the system is
reduced, maximizing the use of destination codes in the system.
The wild card character can be used only for the last digit of a
destination code and represents any digit from 0 to 9, except for
digits already programmed or used by other numbering plans.
Should there be a conflict with other digits already programmed
or used with by numbering plans, the digit will not be displayed.
The wild card character can only be used to group destination
codes that use the same Route and digit absorb length.
Destination codes without the use of a wild card character
Route
Dial Out
Line Pool
555
0162 237 625
Line Pool C
565
0173 133 2211
Line Pool A
Destination codes
Route
Absorb Length
Dial Out
0621
555
3
0162 237 6251
0622
555
3
0162 237 6252
0623
555
3
0162 237 6253
0624
555
3
0162 237 6254
0625
555
3
0162 237 6255
0626
555
3
0162 237 6256
0627
565
All
0173 133 2211
0628
555
3
0162 237 6258
0629
555
3
0162 237 6259
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Services 153
Destination codes with the use of a wild card character
Destination codes
Route
AbsorbLength
Dial Out
062 •
555
3
0162 237 625 •
0627
565
All
0173 133 2211
Enter a destination code that is recognised when used as part of a
telephone number for an outgoing call. It can be up to seven digits
long.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. PressÄ¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows Services.
5. Press ­. The display shows Ringing service.
6. Press Ô until the display shows Routing service.
7. Press ­. The display shows Routes.
8. Press Ô. The display shows Dest codes.
9. Press ­. The display shows Show DstCode:.
10. If there are no codes defined, use ADD, the keypad, and OK to
enter a new destination code (maximum seven). To enter a
wild card character (•) in the destination code, press the ANY
display key.
11. If there are codes defined, press Ô to select one.
12. Use ADD, FIND, and REMOVE to change the destination code.
Normal rte
Select which route a call using the destination code will take
during normal service and for each of the schedules. The
automatic schedule times are programmed under Services. The
default Normal route is 000, which has no Dial Out digits and
uses Line Pool A.
Note: Be sure you have pre-programmed the route. See
"Designating alternate routes for calls" on page 148.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. PressÄ¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
154 Services
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows Services.
5. Press ­. The display shows Ringing service.
6. Press Ô until the display shows Routing service.
7. Press ­. The display shows Routes.
8. Press Ô. The display shows Dest codes.
9. Press ­. The display shows Show DstCode:.
10. If there are no codes defined, use ADD, the keypad, and OK to
enter a new destination code (maximum seven). To enter a
wild card character (•) in the destination code, press the ANY
display key.
11. Press ­. The display shows Normal:.
12. Press CHANGE to select a different route for the destination
code.
13. Enter the three-digit code.
Absorb length
Select the portion of the destination code that is always absorbed
by the system and not used in the dialling sequence.
1. Begin with Normal: (step 11 of the previous procedure).
2. Press ­. The display shows AbsorbLength:.
3. Press CHANGE.
4. Select the number of digits to be absorbed: 0, All, or any
number up to the length of the destination code.
5. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to programme the next
schedule.
If a telephone number does not match any of the programmed
destination codes, the user must first decide which line to select
and then dial the number. To make this task simple and to ensure
that all long-distance calls are being routed consistently, all area
codes in the United Kingdom numbering plan should be
programmed as destination codes.
For example, a destination code for Maidenhead might look like
this:
• Destination code: 01628
Normal route: 003
AbsorbLength: 0
• Route: 003
DialOut: No number
Use: Pool C
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Services 155
A caller wishing to dial Maidenhead might dial 01628 237625.
The system would recognise 01628 as a destination code. It
would select Pool C, absorb no digits, add no Dial Out digits, and
dial the remaining digits to complete the call.
Routing service modifications.
Changes to routes should only be made
during least busy call times or on an idle
system. Plan to programme routes when user
activity is at a minimum.
Turning a manual service on or off with a feature code
There are separate on and off codes for each of these services:
Ringing, Routing, and Restriction.
Ä¡àÚ
Turn on Ringing service.
Ä£¡àÚ Turn off Ringing service.
Ä¡àÛ
Turn on Restriction service.
Ä£¡àÛ Turn off Restriction service.
Ä¡àÜ
Turn on Routing service.
Ä£¡àÜ Turn off Routing service.
To turn on a service
From a Control extension, enter the feature code to turn Ringing,
Restriction, or Routing service on. If activating Restriction or
Routing service, use the password ÛÜßÝß (ADMIN).
The display shows Service Modes ON.
To turn off a service
From a Control extension, enter the feature code to turn Ringing,
Restriction, or Routing service off. The display shows Normal
followed by the name of the service (Ringing, Restr’n, or
Routing).
Assigning control extensions
When Ringing service and Restriction service are set to Manual,
a control extension is used to place the extensions and exchange
lines that it controls into and out of service schedules. A control
extension can be assigned to control either lines or extensions, or
both lines and extensions.
You can also use a control extension to manually override an
automatic schedule.
You may want different lines to be assigned to different control
extensions. For example, if the Customer Service department is
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
156 Services
open during evening hours, you could place the Customer Service
lines under a separate control extension. The Sales department,
which closes at the end of the afternoon, could be placed under a
different control extension that could call on a service schedule
for those lines, while leaving the Customer Service lines
unaffected.
Assigning lines to a control extension
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. PressÄ¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows Services.
5. Press ­. The display shows Ringing service.
6. Press Ô until the display shows Common settings.
7. Press ­. The display shows Control extns.
8. Press ­ twice. The display shows Show line:.
9. Enter the line number. The display shows the line number
followed by the current control extension.
10. Press CHANGE and enter the extension number you want to
assign as the control extension for this line.
11. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Assigning extensions to a control extension
In addition to placing lines into Service modes, a control
extension can apply Restriction service (dialling filters) to other
extensions.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. PressÄ¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows Services.
5. Press ­. The display shows Ringing service.
6. Press Ô until the display shows Common settings.
7. Press ­. The display shows Control extns.
8. Press ­. The display shows For lines.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Services 157
9. Press Ô. The display shows For extns.
10. Press ­. The display shows Show extn#:.
11. Enter the extension number. The display shows the extension
number followed by the current control extension.
12. Press CHANGE and enter the extension number you want to
assign as the control extension for this extension.
13. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Changing the name of a schedule
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. PressÄ¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows Services.
5. Press ­. The display shows Ringing service.
6. Press Ô until the display shows Common settings.
7. Press ­. The display shows Control extns.
8. Press Ô. The display shows Schedule names.
9. Press ­. The display shows Sched 1:.
10. Press CHANGE and enter the name you want to assign to the
schedule.
11. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Changing the time of a schedule
It is only necessary to programme the start and stop times for
schedules that are activated automatically.
If you are programming a schedule to start and stop at the same
time each day, use COPY to transfer the settings from one day to
the next.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. PressÄ¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows Services.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
158 Services
5. Press ­. The display shows Ringing service.
6. Press Ô until the display shows Common settings.
7. Press ­. The display shows Control extns.
8. Press Ô twice. The display shows Schedule times.
9. Press ­. The display shows Monday.
10. Press ­. The display shows Sched:Night.
11. Press ­. The display shows Start time:.
12. Press CHANGE and enter the time you want the schedule to
start.
13. Press Ô. The display shows Stop time:.
14. Press CHANGE and enter the time you want the schedule to
stop. Press OK to accept a.m. or CHANGE to accept p.m.
15. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Passwords
• Password security.........160
• Setting the SAPLUS password.........160
• Setting the Administrator password.........160
• Setting the Basic password.........161
• Hospitality passwords.........162
• I-RAD password.........163
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
160 Passwords
Password security
You can, and should, change your passwords regularly for
security reasons. Keep a record of your passwords in a secure
place, and remember that the longer the password, the more likely
it is to be secure.
See "Chart 20: Passwords" on page 303 in Appendix A for a
programming overview.
Setting the SAPLUS password
The System Administrator Plus password is one to six digits long
and allows you to access all the programming needed to set up the
system for your company. The default password is
àÛàÞ¡à, which spells SAPLUS on the keypad.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô four times. The display shows Passwords.
5. Press ­. The display shows COS pswds.
6. Press Ô until the display shows Progrming pswds.
7. Press ­. The display shows SysAdmin+:.
8. Press CHANGE and enter the new password.
9.
Press OK to accept the new password.
Erasing the SAPLUS password
If you leave the SAPLUS password blank (by entering no digits
in step 8), the password is erased. If you erase the password,
anyone can enter programming without a password.
Setting the Administrator password
The Administrator password is one to six digits long and allows
you to access programming. The default password is
ÛÜßÝß, which spells ADMIN on the keypad.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Passwords 161
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô four times. The display shows Passwords.
5. Press ­. The display shows COS pswds.
6. Press Ô. The display shows Progrming pswds ö.
7. Press ­ until the display shows Sys admin:.
8. Press CHANGE and enter the new password.
9. Press OK to accept the new password.
Erasing the Administrator password
If you leave the Administrator password blank (by entering no
digits in step 8), the password is erased. If you erase the
password, anyone can enter Administrator programming without
a password.
Setting the Basic password
The Basic password is one to six digits long and allows you to
access some programming settings using feature codes. You
cannot enter regular programming with this password. The
default is ÛÛàÝÛ, which spells BASIC on the keypad.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô four times. The display shows Passwords.
5. Press ­. The display shows COS pswds.
6. Press Ô until the display shows Progrming pswds.
7. Press ­. The display shows SysAdmin+:.
8. Press Ô until the display shows Basic:.
9. Press CHANGE and enter the new password.
10. Press OK to accept the new password.
Erasing the Basic password
If you leave the Basic password blank (by entering no digits in
step 9), the password is erased. If you erase the password, anyone
can enter Basic programming without a password.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
162 Passwords
Hospitality passwords
The Hospitality passwords are one to six digits long and allow
you to access some or all of the Hospitality Services feature
programming. There are two types of Hospitality services feature
passwords, the Desk admin password and the Room condition
password.
Setting the Desk admin password
The Desk admin password is used to access all Hospitality
Services admin features. The default Desk admin password is:
î¯ê¸ (4677). To change the default Desk admin
password:
1. Press Ä¥¥‚¯öìéí. The display
reads Password:.
2. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
3. Press Ô until the display reads Passwords.
4. Press ­. The display reads COS pswds.
5. Press Ô until the display reads Hospitality.
6. Press ­. The display reads Desk pswd:4677.
7. Press the CHANGE display key. Enter a one to six digit number.
Press OK.
Room condition password
The Room condition password controls the ability to change the
room condition with Ä¡àß. The default room
condition password is: None. Different from the Desk admin
password, the room condition password can remain as None. To
change the default Room condition password:
1. Press Ä¥¥‚¯öìéí. The display
reads Password:.
2. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
3. Press Ô until the display reads Passwords.
4. Press ­. The display reads COS pswds.
5. Press Ô until the display reads Hospitality.
6. Press ­. The display reads Desk pswd:4677.
7. Press Ô. The display reads Cond pswd:None.
8. Press the CHANGE display key. Enter a one to six digit number.
Press OK.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Passwords 163
I-RAD password
The ability to do remote programming using the Internal Remote
Access Device (I-RAD) is protected by a password.
The default password is the eight-digit System ID number.
However, this password is not usable. It must be initialised by
British telecom (BT) with the Remote Access to Customer’s
Equipment (RACE). BT sets the password, then grants the
customer access once the customer registers their system. After
this, you are able to change the password as required. The
password is represented on the display by asterisks (*) and is
never displayed directly.
The remote administration software used with the I-RAD allows
you to use a password up to10 digits long. A longer password
does not work with the software. Your I-RAD password should
always match the password used with your Remote Set Tools
software.
Changing the I-RAD password
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows Passwords.
5. Press ­. The display shows COS pswds.
6. Press Ô until the display shows IRAD pswd:*****
(displayed only after BT has initialised the system through
RACE with a password).
7. Press CHANGE and use the keypad to enter the old password.
8. Use the keypad to enter the new password.
9. Press OK to accept the new password.
10. Use the keypad to re-enter the new password for verification.
11. The display shows IRAD pswd********.
12. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
164 Passwords
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Call services
• Erasing a forgotten Call log password.........166
• Programming Call services.........166
• 1st Display.........166
• Auto called ID.........167
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
166 Call services
Erasing a forgotten Call log password
If someone forgets their Call log password, you can reset it to
None so that they can set a new one. You cannot set a new
password using this method. You can only erase an existing one.
See "Call Log" on page 264 for information on setting a new Call
log password.
See "Chart 21: Call Log passwords" on page 304 in Appendix A
for a programming overview.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows Passwords.
5. Press ­. The display shows COS pswds.
6. Press Ô. The display shows Call log pswd:.
7. Press ­. The display shows Show extn:_.
8. Enter an extension number.
9. Press ­. The display shows Log pswd:nnnnn.
10. Press CLR to erase the current Call log password.
11. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Programming Call services
See "Chart 22: Call Services" on page 305 in Appendix A for a
programming overview.
1st Display
The 1st Display option lets you choose what call information is
first displayed on that extension. The options are Number or Line.
The default is Numbr.
Depending on the services you subscribe to, Call Display
information may contain the number of the caller, or the name of
the line in your Compact Plus system that the call is on.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Call services 167
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ­. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ­. The display shows Line access.
7. Press Ô until the display shows Call services.
8. Press ­. The display shows Auto call info.
9. Press Ô. The display shows 1st Display.
10. Press CHANGE to choose Numbr or Line.
On an incoming call, the display may show Unknown number if
the information is not available from your telephone company.
You may see Private number on the display if the caller blocks
that information.
Auto called ID
This setting applies to Norstar extensions only. ISDN terminals
can receive calling line identification automatically if supported
by the terminal.
The Auto called ID (identification) momentarily shows the
number of the called party on the display of a Norstar extension.
The default is No, the Auto called ID is not displayed.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ­. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The displays shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ­. The display shows Line access.
7. Press Ô until the display shows Call services.
8. Press ­. The display shows Auto call info.
9. Press Ô until the display shows Auto called ID:.
10. Press CHANGE to choose N (No) or Y (Yes).
11. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
168 Call services
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Remote access
• Programming lines and features for remote access.........170
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
170 Remote access
Programming lines and features for remote access
Remote access packages
Remote access packages allow you to control the remote use of
Compact Plus line pools, the paging feature, administration, and
monitoring of the system.
You create a remote access package by defining which of your
system’s line pools it will be able to access and whether it can use
Page, line pools, and remote administration. You then assign the
package to individual lines (using Rem line access), and to a
particular Class of Service password.
Remote access packages defaults
Parameter
Square
Package 00
PBX
Hybrid
Prohibits remote access to line pools, Page,
remote monitoring and administration. Cannot
be changed.
Package 01
Line pool access
Y for Pool A
N for Pools B and C
Remote Page,
administration, and
monitoring
No
Packages 02 - 15
Line pool access
N for Pools A to C
Remote Page,
administration, and
monitoring
No
You can use COPY and the keypad to copy settings from one
remote package to another.
The line pool access display shows an alphabetic line pool
identifier, followed by a numeric line pool access code in
parentheses (for example, PoolA (9):N). If no access code has
been identified, there is nothing between the brackets (for
example PoolA ( ):N). The line pool access code can be
programmed under Terminals&Extns.
Remote access package 00 is the default setting for the Remote
access package setting. It does not permit access to line pools or
to remote paging. Unlike packages 01 to 15, package 00 cannot
be changed.
You can define up to 15 remote access packages (01 to 15).
For remote users who call into the Compact Plus system to use
lines for calling out, the remote restrictions and line restrictions
still apply.
To use features on a Norstar system remotely, press ¥ followed
by the feature code. Even if you are calling from another Norstar
system, press ¥ instead of Ä.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Remote access 171
Line Pool access
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ­. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press Ô until the display shows Remote access.
7. Press ­. The display shows Remote access pkgs.
8. Press ­ again. The display shows Show pkg:.
9. Enter the number of the package (00 to 15).
10. Press ­. The display shows LinePool access:.
11. Press ­ again. The display shows Pool A:.
12. Press CHANGE to choose N (No) or Y (Yes).
13. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to move to the next line pool.
Remote page
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ­. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press Ô until the display shows Remote access.
7. Press ­. The display shows Remote access pkgs.
8. Press ­ again. The display shows Show pkg:_.
9. Enter the number of the package (00 to 15).
10. Press ­. The display shows LinePool access:.
11. Press Ô. The display shows Remote page:.
12. Press CHANGE to choose N (No) or Y (Yes).
13. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
172 Remote access
Remote admin
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ­. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press Ô until the display shows Remote access.
7. Press ­. The display shows Remote access pkgs.
8. Press ­ again. The display shows Show pkg:.
9. Enter the number of the package (00 to 15).
10. Press ­. The display shows LinePool access:.
11. Press Ô until the display shows Remote admin:.
12. Press CHANGE to choose N (No) or Y (Yes).
13. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Remote monitor
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ­. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press Ô until the display shows Remote access.
7. Press ­. The display shows Remote access pkgs.
8. Press ­ again. The display shows Show pkg:.
9. Enter the number of the package (00 to 15).
10. Press ­. The display shows LinePool access:.
11. Press Ô until the display shows Remote monitor:.
12. Press CHANGE to choose N (No) or Y (Yes).
13. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Remote access 173
Rem line access
Remote line access lets you assign a different remote package to
each line in your system.
L001 Rem pkg
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ­. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press Ô until the display shows Remote access.
7. Press ­. The display shows Remote access pkgs.
8. Press Ô. The display shows Rem line access.
9. Press ­. The display shows Show line:.
10. Enter the line number or press LIST to see line 001.
11. Press CHANGE.
12. Enter the number for the remote package that will apply to the
line whenever it is used by a remote caller.
13. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
174 Remote access
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Auto Attendant
• Auto Attendant.........176
• System Answer.........176
• Custom Call Routing (CCR).........176
• CCR groups.........177
• Direct extension dialling.........177
• Customising System Answer and CCR.........178
• Turning System Answer on or off.........178
• Turning CCR on or off.........179
• Choosing the attendant telephone.........179
• Setting the number of rings before System Answer answers a call.....179
• Setting the number of rings before a caller hears the CCR greeting.....180
• Adding or removing extensions from a CCR group.........180
• Using the pre-recorded greetings.........181
• Using customised greetings for System Answer and CCR.........182
• Recording customised greetings for System Answer and CCR.........183
• Programming or changing CCR destinations.........184
• Testing your custom System Answer and CCR.........184
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
176 Auto Attendant
Auto Attendant
The built-in Auto Attendant automatically answers and directs
incoming calls, which can reduce or eliminate the workload for
the person who answers incoming calls for an office. The Auto
Attendant carries out three tasks: System Answer, Custom Call
Routing (CCR), and direct extension dialling. The Auto
Attendant can transfer calls to a hunt group.
The System Administrator enables the Auto Attendant for your
Compact Plus and programs the lines answered by CCR. The
Auto Attendant is only enabled after you enter Software Keys
(supplied by BT). See "Software Keys" on page 54 for
information about this feature.
See "Chart 23: Auto Attendant" on page 306 in Appendix A for a
programming overview.
System Answer
The System Answer feature simplifies the job of answering calls
by ensuring all calls are answered within a set number of rings.
When calls go unanswered at the telephone monitored by System
answer (called the attendant extension), System Answer answers
the call and plays a greeting. It then puts the call on hold until
someone retrieves it.
If the caller knows the internal number they want to reach or is
using the Compact Plus remote feature, they can dial the number
during the System Answer greeting. If the caller dials the
extension number of the attendant telephone, the call is put on
hold. The greeting is not repeated.
System Answer monitors all external calls that appear as a
flashing line key on the attendant telephone, including answer
keys and external calls that have been transferred. After System
Answer has played the greeting, the call is put on hold at the same
line indicator where it first appeared. System Answer does not
answer calls from internal extensions.
Custom Call Routing (CCR)
The job of answering and transferring calls can be taken over by
CCR. When someone calls on lines monitored by CCR, the
system answers the call and plays your recorded greeting. Callers
using a tone dial set can then
• direct their call by pressing a digit as instructed by your
greeting (for example, ‘to reach our salespeople, press 4’)
• enter an internal telephone number (a fast way for regular
callers to reach someone directly)
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Auto Attendant 177
• access remote features
• reach an attendant by pressing a single digit (a way to transfer
out of CCR and talk to someone who can direct their call)
Callers can also dial an internal number to reach someone who is
working after hours. If CCR forwards a call and it goes
unanswered because
• the caller entered an invalid extension number
• no one is there to answer the call
• the caller entered the extension number of the attendant
telephone
the call is redirected to ring at the Prime extension after the usual
Callback delay. Once a caller has dialled out of the CCR greeting,
they cannot make another selection.
CCR groups
CCR allows callers to reach groups of telephones by dialling a
single digit selected from an audio menu. Create the CCR groups
under the System programming heading.
When a call is sent to a CCR group in which all the telephones
have the same call forward programming, the call goes to the
telephone with the lowest internal number.
If the telephones in a CCR group have different call forward
programming, the call is handled by the telephone programming
that takes effect first. For example, if a telephone in a group
forwards after two rings, it forwards the call from CCR before the
telephones in the group that are programmed to forward after
three rings.
A CCR call is also forwarded by Forward on Busy, the Call
Forward feature code, and Callback programming. Be sure to
keep this in mind when programming the telephones in your CCR
groups.
When a call that was handled by CCR rings at your telephone,
call information appears automatically on the display. You must
subscribe to a Call Display service and have the proper
equipment installed in your system for this feature to work.
Direct extension dialling
Both System Answer and CCR give the caller the opportunity to
dial an internal extension number or to use remote features such
as Direct Inward System Access (DISA). This means callers do
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
178 Auto Attendant
not have to wait to reach the person they are calling, and only the
person they are calling handles the call.
Customising System Answer and CCR
You enable System Answer and CCR for your system and
programme which lines can be answered with CCR (usually
incoming lines). System Answer is available to answer calls to
the attendant telephone (usually the reception telephone).
It is a good idea to plan how you will customise System Answer
and CCR before you start programming.
• Decide which telephone will be the attendant telephone
(where calls can be answered automatically and put on hold).
• Write down the greetings or scripts that you will record (see
examples in “Recording customised greetings for System
Answer and CCR” on page 183).
• Organise your telephones into groups and decide what number
a caller will use to reach each group. Using the groups and
numbers you have created, write down the greeting or script
that the CCR will play.
• Decide how many times a call rings before System Answer
and CCR answer. Be sure it will not conflict with voice mail
or other Auto Attendant applications you may be using. If
CCR lines ring at the attendant set, CCR and System Answer
can also conflict.
• Use a programming session and feature codes to create your
custom System Answer and CCR.
• Test both System Answer and CCR to make sure they are
working properly.
• Make sure you programme your system to use the Held Line
Reminder tone. This will provide another indication that
System Answer has placed a call on hold.
Turning System Answer on or off
System Answer can be turned on and off at any telephone in the
system. System Answer only handles calls that ring at the
attendant extension.
1. Press Ä¥¡ÜÚ. The display shows the current
status of System Answer.
2. Press CHANGE or £.
3. Press ÛÜßÝß (ADMIN) or any password, including
the Basic password.
4. Press CHANGE to choose On or Off.
5. Press OK or ¥ to confirm the change.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Auto Attendant 179
Because System Answer answers calls and then puts them on
hold, the feature should be turned off when no one is at the
telephone to retrieve the calls.
You can programme the feature code for turning System Answer
and CCR on or off on a memory button with an indicator at the
attendant telephone. You know that the feature is turned on when
the indicator is lit at the attendant set.
Turning CCR on or off
1. Press Ä¥¡ÜÛ. The display shows the current
status of CCR.
2. Press CHANGE or £.
3. Press ÛÜßÝß (ADMIN) or any password, including
the Basic password.
4. Press change to choose Off, Bus. Open, or Bus. Closed.
5. Press OK or ¥ to confirm the change.
Choosing the attendant telephone
Programming allows you to choose a telephone to be the
attendant telephone. External calls that go unanswered at this
telephone are handled by System Answer.
1. Place the programming overlay on an M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ÛÜßÝß (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ­ twice. The display shows Attd extn: nnn
(the extension number of the current attendant telephone).
6. Press CHANGE and enter the internal number of the extension
you want to assign as the attendant telephone.
7. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Setting the number of rings before System Answer answers
a call
If the system is busy answering calls, the line rings until System
Answer can retrieve the call.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
180 Auto Attendant
1. Place the programming overlay on an M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ÛÜßÝß (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ­. The display shows Auto Attendant.
6. Press ­. The display shows Attd extn:.
7. Press Ô. The display shows System answer.
8. Press ­. The display shows After:.
9. Press CHANGE to choose 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, or 12
rings.
10. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Setting the number of rings before a caller hears the CCR
greeting
If the system is busy answering calls, the line rings until CCR can
retrieve the call.
1. Place the programming overlay on an M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ÛÜßÝß (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ôuntil the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ­. The display shows Auto Attendant.
6. Press ­. The display shows Attd extn:.
7. Press Ô until the display shows CCR.
8. Press ­. The display shows After:.
9. Press CHANGE to choose 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, or 12
rings.
10. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Adding or removing extensions from a CCR group
The greeting you create for CCR tells a caller to press a number
to reach a group of extensions. You add or remove extensions
from these groups (CCR groups) programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Auto Attendant 181
You can have a total of nine CCR groups. Each group can include
up to 20 extensions.
1. Place the programming overlay on an M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ÛÜßÝß (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ­. The display shows Auto Attendant.
6. Press ­. The display shows Attd extn:.
7. Press Ô until the display shows CCR.
8. Press ­. The display shows After:.
9. Press Ô until the display shows CCR groups.
10. Press ­. The display shows Show group:.
11. Enter the number of the group to which you want to make
changes. The display shows CCR grp 1.
12. Press ­. The display shows Show extn#:.
13. Enter the extension number of the extension you want to add
or remove from the group.
14. Press CHANGE to select the status of the extension in the
group: Assigned or Unassgnd.
15. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Using the pre-recorded greetings
Pre-recorded greetings can be used whenever System Answer or
CCR are turned on. Pre-recorded greetings can be turned off (not
erased) and/or replaced with user-recorded substitutes.
If a pre-recorded greeting is turned off, all SA and CCR features
that use that greeting will be affected.
When pre-recorded greetings are used, incoming callers at the
attendant telephone hear the System Answer greetings. Lines that
are set up to be answered by CCR play one of these pre-recorded
greetings. They are:
• All of our operators are busy.
• If you know the extension that you want, and are using a
touch-tone telephone, please dial it now.
• Or, hold the line and your call will be answered as soon as
possible.
• Thank you for calling.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
182 Auto Attendant
‘Thank you for calling’ is heard when the caller does not respond
to the CCR business closed greeting after it has been repeated,
just before the system disconnects the caller.
Using customised greetings for System Answer and CCR
Compact Plus permits users to make their own voice recordings
for all the greetings used in System Answer and Custom Call
Routing. A combination of pre-recorded greetings and userrecorded greetings can also be used to tell callers how their call is
being handled.
For customer greetings, users can create their own version or turn
the greeting off completely. With system greetings, users can
select either the system version, their own version, or they can
turn the greeting off.
The following table lists the seven available recordings (A-G)
and the features that use them.
Greeting
A (Company greeting)
User recorded example or
pre-recorded message if available (italics)
You have reached British Telecom.
Source
User
Used
by
feature
SA
CCR
B (Business closed)
Our offices are closed. Our business hours are
9 to 5, Monday to Friday.
User
CCR
C (Caller menu)
To reach sales press 1, to reach a receptionist press
0.
User
CCR
D (Thank you)
Cheers.
User or
CCR
Thank you for calling.
Pre-recorded
Wait a moment and someone will pickup.
User or
SA
Or, hold the line and your call will be answered as
soon as possible.
Pre-recorded
CCR
You can dial through if you know the extension
number.
User or
SA
Pre-recorded
CCR
We can’t come to the phone right now.
User or
SA
All of our operators are busy.
Pre-recorded
E (Hold the line)
F (Dial the extension)
If you know the extension that you want, and are
using a touch-tone phone, please dial it now.
G (Operators busy)
Users have a total of 96 seconds of recording time to allocate to
the 7 potential recordings. If a customer begins by recording a 15
second Company Greeting, then there will be
(96-15=81) seconds available for the other remaining
greetings.The maximum length of a single recording is 32
seconds. If a user exceeds the maximum time for a single
recording, an error message and a tone will be given.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Auto Attendant 183
A greeting that is turned off is not erased. The time used by the
greeting will not be returned to the 96 second time pool.
User recordings are stored on the feature card and the recordings
will be erased if the card is replaced. If the same card is removed
and reinserted, the greetings are preserved. The user will have to
re-record all user greetings when they upgrade to the new feature
card.
System greetings are permanent and can never be erased.
FLASH memory degrades slightly each time a message is
recorded. Typically, messages can be erased and written
thousands of times. However, care must be taken to plan out what
messages are to be recorded and how often, in order to reduce the
number of re-recordings made over a long period of time. A
warning will be given when the card has degraded significantly.
This warning indicates that a new card should be obtained.
The pre-recorded system messages do not use any portion of the
96 seconds of total recording time. They cannot be erased, but
they can be turned off or replaced with a user substitute.
For clear sound quality in your greetings, use the handset for
recording greetings (not the handsfree microphone).
Recording customised greetings for System Answer and
CCR
You can record your own versions of any user greetings and prerecorded greetings. You can also turn off any user or pre-recorded
greeting.
1. Press Ä¥¡ÜÜand enter ÛÜßÝß
(ADMIN).
2. The display shows Auto att. grtngs.
3. Press CHANGE if you want to turn the greeting off. A greeting
that is turned off is not erased. The time used by the greeting
will not be returned to the 96 second time pool.
4. Press ­. The display shows Grtg A mode: User.
5. Press PLAY to play the company greeting (A).
6. Press REC to record a company greeting. As soon as you press
REC the previous recording will be erased. Making a
recording of less than 2 seconds duration will also erase a
greeting.
7. Press OK when you have completed your recording.
A company greeting is the first greeting your callers hear.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
184 Auto Attendant
8. To continue recording messages, press NEXT, then REC to
record the business closed greeting (B).
9. Press OK when you have completed your recording.
Example: ‘Our business hours are 8 a.m. to 5 p.m., Monday
through Friday’.
10. To continue recording messages, press NEXT, then REC to
record the caller menu greeting (C).
The greeting used with the caller menu indicates the
destinations you have chosen for each digit.
Example:‘To reach one of our sales agents, press 1. To contact
our accounting office, press 2. To talk to an attendant, press 0.
To repeat this menu, press *’.
11. Continue recording the remaining messages (D-G) if desired.
Remember that some greetings are shared by both SA and
CCR. Ensure that the recording is appropriate for both
features.
12. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Programming or changing CCR destinations
1. Press Ä¥¡ÜÜand enter ÛÜßÝß
(ADMIN).
2. The display shows Auto att. grtngs.
3. Press NEXT. The display shows CCR Tree.
4. Press SHOW. The display shows Dial 0: Att.
5. Press CHANGE if you want to choose Attendant, None, CCR or
grp. Press NEXT until the display shows Dial 0: and the
current destination when the caller presses zero.
6. Press CHANGE to select the appropriate destination.
Each number from zero to nine and * can direct a call to the
attendant telephone or one of the nine CCR groups. The * can
be set up to make the system play the CCR greeting again
(Repeat). If a digit is set to None, it has no destination.
7. Using NEXT and CHANGE, select the destinations for the
remaining digits.
Testing your custom System Answer and CCR
If you have more than one external line, you can call in to hear
your greetings by dialling the number used by external callers to
call the attendant set or a line that is answered using CCR.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Auto Attendant 185
To call systems with only one external line, you have to go to a
telephone that is not connected to your system.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
186 Auto Attendant
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Maintenance
• Beginning a Maintenance session.........188
• Checking the system version of the software.........188
• System Administration Log record.........189
• Clearing a hung line.........193
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
188 Maintenance
Beginning a Maintenance session
Maintenance overview
A Maintenance session helps you diagnose problems that may
occasionally arise within the Compact Plus system.
The Maintenance section of programming has four headings
available for System Administrator programming.
System version
Displays the version number of the System
Processor software.
Clear lines
Clears a hung line. See "Clearing a hung line"
on page 193
Sys admin log
Displays a list of system initialisations,
programming sessions, invalid password
attempts, and password changes.
Remote montr
Allows a technical specialist from a remote
location to monitor the Norstar system. It is not
a regular part of system installation or
maintenance.
You can run a Maintenance session from any working Norstar
M7310N or M7324N telephone. Only one person at a time can
access a Maintenance session. Photocopy the System
Administration Log found at the end of this chapter, and use it to
record maintenance information.
Follow these steps any time you enter a Maintenance session:
1. Release all calls on your telephone.
2. Place the programming overlay on an M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
3. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
4. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
5. Press Ô until the display shows Maintenance.
When necessary, refer back to these five steps on how to begin a
Maintenance programming session. Only one person at a time
can access a Maintenance session.
Checking the system version of the software
System version tells you the version number of the system
processor software found in the Feature cartridge. The release
version can be used to trace a software fault if one occurs. Write
the system processor version number in the maintenance records.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Maintenance 189
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows Maintenance.
5. Press ­. The display shows System version.
6. Press ­. The display shows the version number of
the system processor.
7. Write the system processor version number in the appropriate
maintenance record.
8. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
System Administration Log record
You can check under the Sys admin log heading to find a list of
administrative events performed on Compact Plus. Use the
following table to record these log items whenever you run a
Maintenance session.
1. Place the programming overlay on any M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press Ô until the display shows Maintenance.
5. Press ­. The display shows System version.
6. Press Ô until the display shows Sys admin log.
7. Press ­. The display shows Items in log:.
8. Press Ô and Ò to move down or up the list
of event codes.
9. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
190 Maintenance
System Administration Log
Sys admin log
Log item
Time of log item
Number of repetitions
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Time and date that log
was checked
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
:
/
/
P0905531 Issue 01
Troubleshooting
• Recording and reporting alarm codes.........192
• Clearing lines.........192
• Power failure.........193
• Power-fail telephone.........194
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
192 Troubleshooting
Recording and reporting alarm codes
Occasionally, you may encounter a problem with your Compact
Plus system either from internal or external causes.
You need to know the following:
• the alarm extension that displays messages when there are
problems
• how to recognise and clear hung lines
• when a power failure occurs and what happens with the
system
When there is a problem, the Compact Plus system generates a
message called an alarm code on the Alarm extension. You assign
a Norstar telephone with a two-line display (M7310N or
M7324N) to be the alarm extension.
If an alarm code appears on the Alarm extension’s display
1. Record the alarm code.
2. Press TIME and record the time displayed.
3. Call the Advice Line and report the alarm code.
4. After speaking to the support person, press CLEAR.
Clearing lines
A line is hung when it remains busy, even when no conversation
or data communication is taking place and it cannot be
disconnected by normal means. Lines can become hung when
exchange lines are connected to AC15A private circuits. Lines
connected to a device such as an answering machine, a fax
machine, or a modem can also become hung.
It is a matter of judgement to decide whether a line is hung or
simply in use. When a line is busy, you see a solid indicator next
to the line key and the message, Line in use, when you attempt
to select the line.
If a line is the only line in a line pool, and it is busy, a solid
indicator appears next to the line pool key and the message,
No free lines, appears on the display. For a line that is one of
several lines in a line pool, there is no direct indication that the
line is busy as long as other lines in the line pool are free. The
indicator next to the line pool key and the No free lines
message appear only when all lines in a line pool are busy. If one
or more lines in a line pool become hung, these busy indications
appear with greater frequency than usual.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Troubleshooting 193
Note: If you ensure that all lines assigned to line pools appear
individually on at least one telephone in the system, it is
much easier to detect hung lines.When lines become hung
as a result of a call being directed into or through your
system on a private circuit, they become hung in pairs. The
hung line pair consists of one private circuit and one
exchange line or private circuit. If network lines become
hung regularly, this indicates a problem with your network
configuration.
Clearing a hung line
1. Place the programming overlay on an M7310N or M7324N
telephone.
2. Check the line number of the hung line using Ä
¥â (the Key Inquiry feature).
3. Press Ä¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
4. Press àÛàÞ¡à (SAPLUS).The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
5. Press Ô until the display shows Maintenance.
6. Press ­. The display shows System version.
7. Press Ô. The display shows Clear lines.
8. Press ­. The display shows the number of the first
busy line in the system, followed by the time in hours and
minutes that the line has been busy. If there are no hung lines,
the display shows No busy lines for a short time, then
Clear lines.
9. If this is not the line you want to clear, press Ô until
the line you want to clear is displayed.
10. Press CLEAR to disconnect the line. The display confirms that
the line has been cleared.
11. Press ¨ to exit or Ô to continue programming.
Power failure
If the power fails, your Compact Plus system maintains its
programming for a period of three days. Telephones also keep
their personal programming. The clock always needs to be set to
the correct time after a power failure.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
194 Troubleshooting
Power-fail telephone
Each analogue line card, installed in either the Compact Plus
Central Control Unit (CCU) or a Line Module, provides one
power-fail telephone connection at the Box Connection.
The power-fail telephone is an analogue telephone (not a Norstar
telephone) that functions independently of the Compact Plus
system. You can use the power-fail telephone only when your
Norstar system is disconnected or without power. The power-fail
telephone is usually located near the Compact Plus CCU. If there
is no power-fail telephone next to the CCU, plug a standard
analogue telephone into the power-fail telephone socket located
near the CCU.
The power-fail telephone facility is not supported on a BRI loop.
Norstar customers with digital exchange lines who require
power-fail telephones, have the following options:
• Add analogue exchange lines to the system.
• Install an uninterruptable power supply (UPS) stand-by power
unit for the Compact Plus.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
SECTION III: Using telephone features
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
196
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
About Norstar telephones
• About Norstar telephones.........198
• M7324N telephone.........198
• M7310N telephone.........199
• M7208N telephone.........200
• M7100N telephone.........200
• M7000 telephone.........201
• Release key.........202
• Visually Impaired Operator Console.........202
• Central Answering Position.........203
• Common feature display messages.........204
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
About Norstar telephones 198
About Norstar telephones
Your Norstar telephone system is simple and flexible. You can
use many features with just a few key presses and view what is
happening by reading the telephone display. You can choose
which of its features you want to have available, make them work
the way that suits you best, and assign the features you use
frequently to the keys on your telephone.
The current time and date appear on the display of idle Norstar
telephones.
M7324N telephone
The M7324N telephone has a two-line display, 3 display keys, 24
memory keys with indicators, and Handsfree capability.
M7324N memory key assignments
Square
ºLine 1
ºCall Fwd
Hybrid
ºConf
ºLine 1
PBX
ºCall Fwd
ºConf
Blank
ºCall Fwd
ºConf
ºSpd Dial
Blank
ºSpd Dial
µ
¶ Blank
µ
¶
ºSave No.
Ï Blank
ºSave No.
Ï
ºLine 2
ºSpd Dial
Blank
µ ¶ Blank
Blank
ºSave No.
Ï Blank
Blank
Blank
ºVce Call
Blank
Blank
ºVce Call
Blank
Blank
ºVce Call
Blank
Blank
¹ Blank
Blank
¹ Blank
Blank
¹
Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
Æ
Æ
Blank
Blank
Æ
Æ
Blank
Blank
Æ
Æ
P0905531 Issue 01
ºLine Pool
Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
About Norstar telephones 199
M7310N telephone
The M7310N telephone has a two-line display, 3 display keys, 10
memory keys with indicators, 12 dual-memory keys without
indicators, and Handsfree capability.
M7310N memory key assignments
Square
Hybrid
PBX
ºLine 1
ºLine 1
ºLine Pool
ºLine 2
ºLine Pool
ºConf/tran
ºCall Fwd
ºCall Fwd
ºCall Fwd
Ï
Ï
Ï
ºSpd Dial
ºSpd Dial
ºSpd Dial
¶
¶
¶
µ
µ
µ
¹
¹
¹
Æ
Æ
Æ
Æ
Æ
Æ
M7310N key assignments for dual-memory keys (all templates)
8 x 24 system
P0905531 Issue 01
8 x 16 system
ºExtn 233
ºExtn 221
ºExtn 240
ºExtn 227
ºExtn 233
ºExtn 221
Blank
ºExtn 227
ºExtn 234
ºExtn 222
ºExtn 241
ºExtn 228
ºExtn 234
ºExtn 222
Blank
ºExtn 228
ºExtn 235
ºExtn 223
ºExtn 242
ºExtn 229
ºExtn 235
ºExtn 223
Blank
ºExtn 229
ºExtn 236
ºExtn 224
ºExtn 243
ºExtn 230
ºExtn 236
ºExtn 224
Blank
ºExtn 230
ºExtn 237
ºExtn 225
ºExtn 244
ºExtn 231
ºExtn 237
ºExtn 225
Blank
ºExtn 231
ºExtn 239
ºExtn 226
ºExtn 245
ºExtn 232
Blank
ºExtn 226
Blank
ºExtn 232
The defaults shown
may not actually occur
on any telephone, as
no telephone has an
Autodial key for itself.
The extension number
for each telephone
appears as a blank
key on that telephone.
Extension number
238 does not appear
because it is assigned
to the I-RAD.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
About Norstar telephones 200
M7208N telephone
The M7208N telephone has a single-line display, 8 memory keys
with indicators, and Handsfree capability.
M7208N memory key assignments
Square
Hybrid
PBX
ºLine 1
ºLine 1
ºLine Pool
ºLine 2
ºLine Pool
Ï
µ
µ
µ
¹
¹
¹
ºSpd Dial
ºSpd Dial
ºSpd Dial
ºConf/tran
ºConf/tran
ºConf/tran
Æ
Æ
Æ
Æ
Æ
Æ
M7100N telephone
The M7100N telephone has a single-line display and 1 memory
key with no indicator.
Because the M7100N does not have any line keys, it sometimes
works slightly differently from other Norstar telephones. Where
other telephones may require you to select a line key to answer a
call, the M7100N requires only that you pick up the handset.
Where other telephones require you to select a line key to take a
call off hold, you press ú on the M7100N.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
About Norstar telephones 201
The M7100N cannot have a Handsfree/Mute key. You will find
special instructions for the M7100N in some feature descriptions.
M7100N key assignment (all templates)
µ
M7000 telephone
The M7000 telephone does not have any line keys. To answer a
call with the M7000 telephone, lift the handset. To place a call on
hold you press the ³ key and press ³ key
again to connect the call. The M7000 telephone does not have a
Handsfree/Mute key.
The M7000 telephone is commonly used with the Hospitality
Services feature.
Programming memory keys
The M7000 telephone has 4 programmable keys. Features
programmed on the M7000 telephone’s programmable keys have
the following restrictions:
• do not have a display for information or instructions
• do not have line or extension keys
To program standard features:
External autodial
1. Press ²¥Ú.
2. Press the key you want to programme.
3. Enter the telephone number.
4. Press the ³ key.
Internal autodial (DSS)
1. Press ²¥Û.
2. Press the key you want to programme.
3. Enter the telephone number.
Feature access key
1. Press ²¥Ü.
2. Press the key you want to program.
3. Press ² and the code you wish to programme.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
About Norstar telephones 202
Personal Speed Dial programming
1. Press ²¥Ý.
2. Enter the speed dial code.
3. Enter the telephone number.
4. Press the ³ key.
Ring Type programming
1. Press ²¥ß.
2. Press 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the Ring type desired.
3. Press the ³ key.
M7000 tones
Since the M7000 telephone does not have a display you will hear
the following tones:
• stuttered dialtone for Do Not Disturb and Call Forward
• single, low frequency command input tone
• single, high frequency confirmation tone
Note: The lamp shows a solid light if there is a message from a
Direct-Dial extension or a Voicemail message for an
M7000 telephone.
Release key
Pressing ¨ ends a call. You do not have to put the handset
down. ¨ also ends feature programming. While you are on a
call, do not press ¨ to end a feature you are using. If you do,
you disconnect the call. Press Ä instead.
Visually Impaired Operator Console
The Compact Plus system supports a Visually Impaired Operator
Console (VIOC) for the visually impaired attendant. The VIOC
provides computer-based speech synthesis for the programming
interface. A VIOC consists of an M7324N telephone, a CAPN
module, an IBM-compatible PC, a PCI-B card, a PC-based voice
synthesizer card, and an analogue mixer card.
The PC uses the PCI-B to obtain information from the Central
Control Unit (CCU) and controls the voice synthesizer to
generate audible prompts. The synthesizer output is routed to a
headset where it is coupled with the telephone call in progress,
enabling the operator to respond to the caller and to hear status
information at the same time.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
About Norstar telephones 203
The PCI-B is an add-on card for the PC that allows applications
running on the PC to access the Compact Plus D-channel
signalling and B-2 data channels. The VIOC requires D-channel
signals.
The voice synthesizer card is an add-on for the PC that is capable
of performing text-to-speech synthesis. The volume and speed of
the synthesized speech can be adjusted by the user.
The analogue mixer card is an add-on for the PC that takes the
analogue signal from the voice synthesizer and mixes it with the
headset audio output from the M7324N extension. The result is
sent to the headset port of the mixer card. The mixer card does not
provide any volume control.
To use the VIOC function, the display language needs to be set to
Operating. See ‘Changing the display language’ on page 109 for
instructions.
Central Answering Position
The Central Answering Position (CAPN) is a Norstar M7324N
telephone with at least one CAPN module attached. The CAPN
module is an add-on device that provides 48 extra memory or line
keys. You can connect one or two CAPN modules to an M7324N
telephone.
The CAPN is usually the Prime extension and the Direct-Dial
telephone for the lines and telephones it serves.
M7324N telephone
CAPN module
The CAPN module key mapping is the same for all templates. All
keys are blank keys by default.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
About Norstar telephones 204
Common feature display messages
You may see the following displays when using a feature.
P0905531 Issue 01
Access denied
Someone is already using programming, or
the feature you are trying to use is not
compatible with the configuration of the
telephone or line.
Denied in admin
You have tried to use a feature, but you
have not been given access to it in
programming.
Feature timeout
You have taken more than 15 seconds to
press a button in response to a display.
Inactive feature
You have entered a feature code that is
used by an application programme that
your system does not have.
Invalid code
You have entered an invalid feature code.
Not available
You have tried to use a feature that is not
available in the present set-up of your
Compact Plus system.
Set locked
You cannot use the feature you have chosen
because your telephone is locked. See
‘Locking an extension’ on page 86.
1234567890123É
VIEWâ OK
Press £ or press VIEWâor áVIEW to view a
number that is too long to fit on the display.
Press ú or OK when you are
finished.
¤
This indicates a long-distance call. (May be
available with Call Display services.)
239>221
Either you are receiving an internal call
from telephone 239 forwarded by
telephone 221, or you have an answer
button for telephone 221 and an internal
call from 239 is ringing on 221.
221
TRANSFER
You are connected to an internal call. Press
TRANSFER to transfer the call.
221 calling
You are receiving a call from telephone
221.
Call 221?
YES NO
You have received a Ring Again offer for a
call to an internal telephone. Press the
flashing internal line button or YES to call
the number again. On the M7100N
telephone, just lift the receiver. Otherwise,
press NO or wait 30 seconds for the Ring
Again offer to expire. For an explanation of
Ring Again, see ‘Using Ring Again’ on
page 260.
Camped: 221
CALLBACK
The person to whom you camped the call
did not answer it. The call has come back to
you. Press the line button or CALLBACK to
reconnect to the call.
Line001
TRANSFER
You are connected to an external call. Press
TRANSFER to transfer the call.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
About Norstar telephones 205
P0905531 Issue 01
Line001>221
Either you are receiving an external call
forwarded from telephone 221, or you
have an answer button for telephone 221
and an external call is ringing on that
telephone.
Line001 transfer
The call on line 001 is being transferred to
you by someone else in your Compact Plus
system.
Line001 waiting
A camped call is waiting. Press the line
button or use Call Queuing to answer the
call. Press ú if you have an
M7100N telephone.
No calls waiting
You tried to use Call Queuing but no call
was ringing at your telephone.
No line selected
There is no call ringing at your telephone. If
you have a flashing line button but your
telephone is not ringing, press the line
button to answer the call on that line.
Not in service
The telephone to which you directed a call
is not in service or is otherwise unavailable.
The call is returned to your telephone.
Parked call
CALLBACK
No one answered the call you parked. The
call has come back to you.
Pick up receiver
You have used the Call Queuing feature
without picking up the receiver. Auto
Handsfree has not been assigned to your
telephone. You must use the receiver or
© to answer a call.
Priority>221
BLOCK
You are receiving a Priority call. If you are
on another call, inform the person you are
speaking to that the call is about to be put
on hold. Press the flashing line indicator of
the Priority call or wait until the call
connects automatically (in 8 seconds). The
Priority call goes through when you hear
the next beep. Your active call is placed on
Exclusive Hold. It is reconnected
automatically when the Priority call ends
(unless you transfer the Priority call, in
which case you must press the line button of
your original call to reconnect). Use DND
(Ä¡Þ) or press BLOCK to reject
a Priority call.
Release a call
You have no free line buttons on which to
receive a call. Release one of your current
calls and try to answer the incoming call
again.
Use line pool?
YES NO
You have received a Ring Again offer for a
line pool. Press the flashing internal line
button or YES to use the line pool. On the
M7100N telephone, just lift the receiver.
Otherwise, press NO or wait 30 seconds for
the Ring Again offer to expire.
Hold or release
You cannot programme a feature button
while you are on a call.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
About Norstar telephones 206
P0905531 Issue 01
Release calls
You have tried to use a feature while you
were on a call or had calls on hold. Release
the call, or calls, before using the feature.
Line in use
The line is in use. Make the call using
normal methods or wait until the line is free.
No button free
You have tried to make, receive, or pick up
a call when no line button was available.
Some features also require you to have a
button free. Releasing calls can free up line
buttons.
Make calls first
The feature you tried to use requires you to
be on an active call at your telephone. This
display also appears when information
about a call has been cleared by a system
reset.
No free lines
All the lines or line pools available to the
telephone are in use. This display also
appears when you have tried to dial an
external number or use a feature that
conflicts with the lines, line pools, or Prime
line used by the telephone.This must be
corrected by your Customer Service
representative or installer.
No line selected
The telephone has been set up to dial an
external number on a Prime line but the
telephone does not have a prime line. This
must be corrected by your Customer
Service representative or installer.
In use: 221
You have tried to programme redirection
while someone else is programming
redirection. Only one person can
programme line redirection at a time.
Incoming only
The line you are trying to use for redirecting
calls is for incoming calls only. Choose an
outgoing line.
9_
QUIT BKSP OK
Continue entering digits. PressÃ
or BKSP to delete incorrect digits. Press
ú or OK when you are finished.
Invalid number
You have entered an invalid line pool code
or an invalid destination code.
Line denied
You have selected a line that is private to
another telephone.
Restricted call
The destination you have chosen for Line
redirection is restricted.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Customising a Norstar telephone
• Dialling mode.........208
• Display contrast.........209
• Key Inquiry.........209
• Moving line keys.........210
• Ring type.........210
• Ring volume.........211
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Customising a Norstar telephone 208
Dialling mode
Norstar telephones support three dialling modes. All three
methods let you dial a call without picking up the handset. The
special features of the Automatic dial and Pre-dial settings are
available only when you dial without picking up the handset.
• Standard dial—You make a call by selecting a line and dialling
the number. If you have a prime line, it is selected
automatically when you lift the handset or press ©.
• Automatic dial—If you have a Prime line assigned to your
telephone, you can dial a number without selecting a line.
Your prime line is selected as soon as you start dialling a
number. Automatic dial does not work if your telephone has
no prime line or if the prime line is in use. Telephones
connected to an Analogue Terminal Adapter (ATA) cannot use
Automatic dial.
• Pre-dial—Allows you to enter a telephone number, check it,
then change it before actually making the call. The call is not
dialled until you select a line or line pool or pick up the
handset.
You can pre-dial external and extension numbers. You must,
however, select the correct type of line (external or internal)
for the type of number you have entered. If all the lines on your
telephone are busy, you cannot enter a telephone number. If
your telephone starts ringing while you are pre-dialling a
number, you can stop the ringing by turning on
Do Not Disturb (Ä¡Þ). This does not affect
numbers you are entering.
Setting the dialling mode of your telephone
1. Press Ä¥¡Û
2. Press £ or NEXT to choose Automatic dial, Predial, or
Standard dial.
3. Press ú or OK to select the displayed dial mode.
Note: Standard dial does not support dialling without lifting the
handset of an M7100N telephone. If you have an M7100N
telephone, use the Automatic dial or Pre-dial modes for
dialling without lifting the handset.
Note: The dialling modes feature code cannot be programmed to
a memory key.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Customising a Norstar telephone 209
Display contrast
You can adjust the contrast on your telephone display to make it
easier to read.
1. Press Ä¥à. The display shows Contrast level
4.
2. Press a number on the keypad for the contrast level you want;
or if you have a two-line telephone, press UP and DOWN to
adjust the contrast.
3. Press ú or OK to set the new contrast level.
Key Inquiry
Ensure that the function of a key matches its label by pressing
Ä¥â and then the key to display its function. On the
M7100N telephone, Key Inquiry shows your extension number
followed by the function assigned to your single-memory key.
To find out your extension number, use the Key Inquiry feature
(Ä¥â) on an intercom key.
Displays
001 Line001
SHOW OK
The display shows the number and name of
the line. Press SHOW to view the redirection
status of the line.
123456789012345É
VIEWâ OK
Press £ or press VIEWâ or áVIEW to view a
number that is too long to fit on the display.
Press ú or OK when you are done.
21 <SETNAME>
NEXT VIEWâ
The display shows the directory number of the
telephone and the assigned name. Press NEXT
to see the first line assigned to ring at the
intercom key.
<Feature name>
SHOW OK
The name of the feature assigned to a key is
displayed when you press the key. Press £
or SHOW for additional information.
Press a key
EXIT
Press the key you want to check. Press
Ä or EXIT when you are finished.
Labelling keys on the telephone
After programming a key on your telephone, you may wish to
label it or cap it with one of the pre-labelled key caps. When you
are labelling or removing a key cap, activate Key Inquiry
(Ä¥â) first so that you do not accidentally activate a
feature.
Note: On the M7100N, Key Inquiry shows your extension
number followed by the function assigned to your
single- memory key.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Customising a Norstar telephone 210
To remove a key cap, slip the fingernails of your index fingers
under each end of the key cap and pull up until it pops off. If you
do not have a printed key cap to replace it, you can write the name
in the blank label space beside the key (on the M7324N,
M7208N, and M7100N telephones).
Moving line keys
You can move exchange lines to different keys on your telephone.
Use this feature to arrange your lines as you prefer.
1. Press Ä¥¡Ú.
2. Press the key you want to move the line from.
3. Press the key you want to move the line to.
4. Press Ä or QUIT when you are finished moving
lines.
Displays
Exchanged
The two keys you selected have exchanged
position.
Invalid location
You have tried to move a line to a key that
cannot be used as a line key, such as an
intercom key, Handsfree/Mute key, or an
Answer key.
Move line from:
QUIT
Press the key of the line you want to move.
Press Ä or QUIT when you have
finished moving lines.
Move line to:
QUIT
Press the key you want to move the line to.
Neither of the keys is erased. The lines, or the
line and feature, simply switch places.
Press a line
The key you are trying to move is not a line
key. If you are trying to switch a line and a
feature, move the line to the Feature key and
not the Feature key to the line.
Ring type
To help you recognise which telephone is ringing in an open
office, you can choose one of four distinctive rings for your
telephone.
1. Press Ä¥ß.
2. Press 1, 2, 3, 4, or NEXT. You hear the selected ring for 2
seconds.
3. Repeat until you hear the ring you prefer, then press
ú or OK. The display briefly shows
New ring stored.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Customising a Norstar telephone 211
Ring volume
1. Press Ä¥¡â to make the telephone ring.
2. Press à to adjust the volume up or down.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Customising a Norstar telephone 212
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Using personal features
• Background music.........214
• Do Not Disturb.........214
• Personal Speed Dial codes.........215
• Using Speed Dial.........215
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Using personal features 214
Background music
If an external music source has been connected to your Compact
Plus system, this feature allows you to play music over your
telephone speaker.
Press Ä¡ß.
The music pauses while you are making or answering a call.
To cancel, press Ä£¡ß.
Do Not Disturb
Extensions that are members of a hunt group can temporarily
leave a hunt group by activating this feature. Hunt group calls
arriving while an extension is in Do Not Disturb mode will be
forwarded to the next member in the hunt group.
Stopping calls from ringing at your telephone using Do Not
Disturb (DND)
You can stop calls from ringing at your telephone by pressing
Ä¡Þ. The display shows Do not disturb.
Only Priority calls ring at your telephone. A line key will flash
when you receive a call, but your telephone does not ring.
Refusing to answer a call
While you are on a call, you can refuse to answer a second call
(including a Priority call).
Press Ä¡Þ while your telephone is ringing.
Cancelling Do Not Disturb
Press Ä£¡Þ. The display briefly shows Allow
calls. Your telephone now receives calls normally.
Using Do Not Disturb
Once you turn Do Not Disturb on, calls are forwarded to the
Prime extension only if there is no other telephone on which the
line appears. If there is another telephone that shares the same
line, the call may be answered by that person.
Do Not Disturb also prevents voice calls from alerting at your
telephone. Voice calls are presented as normal intercom calls.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Using personal features 215
Personal Speed Dial codes
You can quickly dial external telephone numbers that have been
programmed onto Speed Dial codes. Speed Dial codes
• 01 to 70 are programmed for the entire system by you and can
be used on any telephone in the Compact Plus system
• 71 to 94 are personal and may be programmed differently at
each Norstar telephone by the user
Speed dial numbers are generally subject to any call barring
restrictions that have been programmed in the Compact Plus
system.
Using Speed Dial
Compact Plus provides two types of speed dialling: system and
personal. System Speed Dial programming allows you to assign
two-digit Speed Dial codes to the external numbers your
colleagues call most frequently. Personal Speed Dial
programming allows individuals to programme their own Speed
Dial numbers.
Speed Dial numbers are subject to the same restriction filters as
regularly dialled numbers. You can programme system Speed
Dial numbers to bypass dialling restrictions.
Speed Dial numbers may include host system signalling codes.
System Speed Dial codes are numbered from 01 to 70. You assign
numbers to System Speed Dial codes for the entire system. See
‘Assigning a number to a System speed dial code’ on page 58.
Note: There is no difference between using Personal Speed Dial
and using System Speed Dial. They differ only in how you
programme them.
Adding or changing Personal Speed Dial
1. Press Ä¥Ý.
2. Enter a two-digit code from 71 to 94 that you want to
associate with a telephone number.
3. To include a line selection for this number, press the line or
intercom key. To select a line pool, press a programmed line
pool key, or press Æ and enter a line pool access
code. For the M7100N telephone, you can only select a line
pool.
4. Enter the number you want to programme.
5. Press ú or OK.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Using personal features 216
Displays storing and dialling a Personal Speed Dial number
Continue entering the number you wish to
9_
CANCL BKSP OK
programme. You can change the number by
pressing BKSP or Ã. When you are
finished, press ú or OK.
Enter digits
QUIT OK
Enter the telephone number you wish to
programme exactly as you would if you were
dialling it normally. When you are finished,
press ú or OK. This message appears
only after you select a line or line pool.
Error code:
Enter a two-digit number between 71 and 94
to select the code for programming.
No number stored
There is no number stored on the speed dial
code you have dialled.
Program and HOLD
On the M7100N or M7208N only, if you
want to programme a line or line pool
selection for this speed dial number, select the
line or line pool. Otherwise, enter the
telephone number exactly as you would if you
were dialling it normally. When you are
finished, press ú.
Program and OK
QUIT OK
If you want to programme a line or line pool
selection for this speed dial number, select the
line or line pool. Otherwise, enter the
telephone number you wish to programme
exactly as you would if you were dialling it
normally. When you are finished, press OK.
Select a line
There is no line associated with the speed dial
number you are trying to use. Select a free
exchange line or line pool, and enter the
speed dial feature code again.
Unknown number
The system cannot dial the number stored.
Re-programme the number.
Speed dial>
Enter a two-digit number between 01 and 94
to select the code for dialling.
No free lines
LATER
All lines are busy. Press LATER, then YES to
have the system notify you when a line is free.
Making a Speed Dial call
To make a call using a personal or System Speed Dial code:
1. Press Äâ.
2. Enter the appropriate two-digit Speed Dial code (01–94).
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Answering calls
• Answering a call.........218
• Privacy feature (external calls only).........218
• Answering the next queued call.........218
• Answering hunt group calls.........219
• Multiple appearances of DIA lines.........219
• Using Handsfree.........219
• Answering a telephone using Directed Pickup.........221
• Answering a telephone using Pickup Group.........221
• Answer keys.........222
• Listening in a group.........223
• Disconnecting accidentally.........223
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Answering calls 218
Answering a call
When a call rings at the telephone, pick up the handset or press
© to connect the call.
Privacy feature (external calls only)
Lines in your system can be programmed to have Automatic
Privacy. If a line is programmed with Automatic Privacy, only
one person at a time can use the line. If a line is not programmed
with Automatic Privacy, anyone with the line assigned to their
telephone can join your call by pressing the line key. Should
another telephone join your call, you hear a tone and see a
message on the telephone display. A telephone cannot join a call
without this tone being heard.
If a line is not programmed with Automatic Privacy, you can still
use the Privacy feature by pressing Ä¡Ü after
connecting an external call.
Note: Privacy control cannot be used on internal or conference
calls.
Creating a conference by releasing Privacy
If a line is programmed with Automatic Privacy, you can turn
privacy off to allow another person with the same line to join in
your conversation and form a conference. All the rules applicable
to a conference apply, except there is only one line in use instead
of the normal two. This means that you cannot split a conference
that was set up by releasing Privacy.
1. After connecting an external call, press Ä¡Ü.
2. Tell the other person to press the line button and join your
conversation.
Only two Norstar telephones in addition to the external caller can
take part in this kind of conference.
Answering the next queued call
An attendant who has many calls coming in at once can use Call
Queuing to help them answer the calls in order. When there is
more than one call ringing, you can answer the call that has been
ringing longest. If you are already on an incoming call, it is put
on hold and the next longest waiting call is automatically
connected.
1. After you pick up the handset, press Ä¡âÚ.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Answering calls 219
Answering hunt group calls
The three hunt group distribution modes allow you to customise
how hunt group calls are distributed in your office.
In Broadcast mode, a single incoming call will ring
simultaneously at all the extensions in a group. In a busy office
you might have three receptionists in a hunt group. Each
receptionist has a hunt group button on their telephone so
incoming calls alert at all three telephones, if available, and can
be answered by any one of the receptionists. The other two
telephones do not track the call.
The sequential distribution mode follows the programmed
member order when distributing calls. The incoming call starts at
the first extension in the hunt group and directs the call through
the hunt group members in order until a hunt group member
answers the call. The next hunt group call goes through the same
distribution process.
In this mode, you can programme your most experienced
personnel to be the first members of the group to receive
incoming calls.
The cyclical distribution starts the call at the extension following
the one which was last presented with a call. So if extension 223,
224 and 225 are members 01,02 and 03 respectively of a hunt
group and the last call was answered by 224 (member 02), the
next incoming call will start with extension 225 (member 03).
This way, you can ensure that all your personnel are receiving
calls, rather than one person receiving the majority of calls.
Multiple appearances of DIA lines
DIA lines can be assigned to one or more telephones. Calls on
DIA lines alert at all telephones programmed with appearances of
the DIA line. Once the DIA call is answered, the call is no longer
tracked by any other telephone with the appearance of the DIA
line, leaving the other telephones free to receive subsequent
incoming calls.
Using Handsfree
Norstar telephones allow you to make calls without using the
handset. The M7100N telephone does not support handsfree
operation.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Answering calls 220
Making calls without lifting the handset
1. If you do not have a Prime line assigned to your telephone,
press a line key.
2. Press ©. The telephone’s internal microphone and
speaker are automatically turned on.
3. Dial your call and speak at a normal level.
Answering calls without lifting the handset
1. Press the line key for the ringing call. (This step is not
necessary if you have a Prime line assigned to your
telephone.)
2. When your telephone rings, press © and speak
normally.
Direct your voice toward the telephone. The closer you are to the
telephone, the easier it is for the microphone to transmit your
voice clearly to your listener.
Muting a Handsfree call
You can switch off the telephone microphone so that you can
speak privately while you are on a Handsfree call.
Press ©. The microphone is turned off.
To turn the microphone back on again and continue your
Handsfree call, press ©.
Note: The indicator next to © is solid when you are in
Handsfree mode. It flashes when you mute the
microphone.
Changing a handset call to a Handsfree call
Press © and hang up the handset.
Changing a Handsfree to a regular call
Lift the handset.
Hints for using Handsfree
Wait for your caller to finish talking before you speak. The
microphone and speaker cannot be on at the same time. Your
caller's voice may be cut off if you both speak at the same time.
Noises such as a tapping pencil could be loud enough to turn on
your microphone and cut off your caller’s speech.
To prevent a possible echo, keep the area around your telephone
free of paper and other objects that might screen your
microphone. Turning down the microphone’s volume (press
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Answering calls 221
à while speaking) also prevents echoes. When you
change the volume level, both the microphone and speaker
volume are adjusted to prevent feedback problems.
Place the telephone so that any unavoidable local noise (such as
an air conditioner) is behind it. This limits the amount of
disruptive background noise being transmitted.
In open-concept environments, use the handset when Handsfree
communication is not necessary or when you need privacy during
a call. Another option is to use a headset.
Answering a telephone using Directed Pickup
You can answer any telephone that is ringing in your Compact
Plus system using Directed Pickup or Group Pickup.
1. Press Äàß.
2. Enter the extension number of the ringing telephone.
Directed Pickup cannot be used to answer private lines.
To use Directed Pickup, the telephone must be ringing. If, for
example, the auxiliary ringer is ringing but the call is not ringing
at a telephone, the call cannot be answered using Directed
Pickup. It must be answered normally at a telephone that has a
flashing indicator for the call or by using Trunk Answer. You can
also answer a call that is ringing when someone has transferred
the call to a telephone and the call is ringing on an intercom key.
Directed Pickup can also retrieve calls that are ringing on an
Answer extension number. Although you may enter the extension
number of the telephone you hear ringing, it may be calls from
another telephone you are answering.
Answering a telephone using Pickup Group
Your Compact Plus system can be divided into four Pickup
Groups. If you are a member of a Pickup Group, you can pick up
a call that is ringing at any telephone in your Pickup Group.
PressÄàÞ.
Note: Group Pickup cannot be used to retrieve a camped call.
If there is more than one incoming call at a telephone in a Pickup
Group, a call ringing on an exchange line is answered first,
followed by calls on the Prime line and, finally, calls on internal
lines.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Answering calls 222
Displays
Already joined
Pickup denied
You are already connected to the telephone
that made the call you are trying to pick up.
This can happen if you are on a call to a
colleague, your colleague dials the number of
a telephone in your Pickup Group, and you
attempt to pick up that call.
There is no call that you can pick up or the call
that was ringing has already been answered.
You have tried to pick up a call on someone
else’s private line.
Pickup:
Enter the extension number of the telephone
that is ringing. (You may use an internal
autodial key to do this.)
If you decide not to answer a ringing call after
you have activated Directed Pickup, press
Ä.
Trunk Answer
The Trunk Answer feature lets you answer a ringing call
anywhere in the system from any telephone in the system. The
line you are answering does not have to appear or ring at the
telephone you are using. Trunk Answer works only with calls that
are ringing on lines for which a Ringing service schedule is active
and if Trunk Answer is enabled.
Answering a call using Trunk Answer
Press Ä¡ââ.
If there is more than one incoming call on lines in a Ringing
service, the Trunk Answer feature picks up the external call that
has been ringing the longest.
Displays
Line denied
Pickup denied
You have tried to pick up a call on someone
else’s private line.
The call that is ringing is on a line that is not
in a Ringing Service.
Note: Trunk Answer does not pick up calls that are coming in on
a private line.
Answer keys
An Answer key lets a telephone answer calls intended for another
telephone. For example, an Answer key allows an assistant to
answer incoming calls to a manager’s telephone.
When installing your Compact Plus system, you assign
telephones to have Answer keys for other extensions. You also set
whether the incoming call for the monitored extension will ring
at the Answer key or simply activate the key indicator (» or ¼).
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Answering calls 223
A Norstar telephone may have up to four Answer keys to monitor
other extensions.
M7100N telephones and ISDN terminals cannot be assigned
Answer keys to monitor other extensions, but they can be
monitored.
Each Answer key should be clearly labelled with the name or
number of the extension it monitors.
You cannot make calls using Answer keys.
If more than one call is ringing at someone’s telephone, the first
call appears on the attendant’s Answer key. Any subsequent calls
appear on intercom keys, if they are available.
More than one attendant may have an Answer key for a single
telephone. This allows two or more attendants to handle calls for
a busy person. Each telephone can handle calls for up to four
other people using separate Answer keys for each person.
Listening in a group
The Group Listen feature allows other people in your office to
listen in on a call without the caller hearing any noise from the
office by turning the telephone’s external microphone off.
1. Press Ä¡âÛ. You hear the caller’s voice
through your telephone’s speaker.
2. Speak to the caller through the telephone handset.
To cancel the Group Listen feature during your call, press
Ä£¡âÛ.
Group Listen is cancelled automatically when you hang up the
call.
You can switch a Group Listen call to Handsfree by pressing
©. To switch back to Group Listen, enter the Group
Listen feature code again.
Note: Keep the handset away from the speaker or you may hear
feedback. Press ¨ to prevent feedback when hanging
up.
Disconnecting accidentally
If you accidentally drop the handset into the telephone cradle
while answering a call, you can retrieve the call by picking up the
handset. The system calls on the © feature, which keeps
the call active.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Answering calls 224
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Holding calls
• Holding.........226
• Listening on hold.........226
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Holding calls 226
Holding
When you put a call on hold, the Compact Plus system maintains
the connection to the caller but the call is no longer active at your
telephone. The indicator flashes on all telephones that have
access to the line with the call on hold. The call can be retrieved
from any of these telephones.
If the call comes in on a DIA line, the indicator flashes at the
telephone that answered the call, leaving other telephones with
appearances of that DIA line free to take other incoming calls.
The call can be retrieved at the answering extension.
On the M7100N telephone, ú alternates between two
lines: one active, one on hold. The M7100N telephone cannot
retrieve a call placed on hold by another telephone.
Answered hunt group calls can be placed on hold at the answering
extension.
To put a call on hold, press ú.
To retrieve a held call, press the flashing line key of the held call.
Automatic Hold
If you are on a call and want to pickup another call at your
telephone, use Automatic Hold.
Press the line key of the caller you want to speak to. Your current
caller is put on hold automatically.
Exclusive Hold
You can put a call on Exclusive Hold so that it can be retrieved
only at your telephone.
Press Äàá or Äú. The line
appears busy on all other telephones, and the call cannot be
picked up by anyone else in the office.
Display
On hold: LINENAM
You have placed one or more lines on hold.
The name of the line that has been held the
longest is displayed. This feature works with
external calls only.
Listening on hold
If you have been put on hold, Listen on Hold lets you replace the
handset and wait to hear when the other person speaks.
If Automatic Handsfree has been assigned to your telephone, you
can use the Handsfree/Mute feature instead of Listen on Hold.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Holding calls 227
Without Handsfree
1. Press ú.
2. Hang up the handset.
3. Press the line key of the call. You may hear indications from
the far end that you are on hold (for example, tones or music).
Your telephone’s microphone is off so no one at the other end
can hear anything in your office.
4. When the person you were talking to returns, you hear them
through your telephone speaker. Lift the handset and talk.
With Handsfree
1. If using the handset, press ©.
2. Hang up the handset.
3. Press © again. Your microphone is off but you can
hear when the caller returns.
4. When the caller returns, press © or lift the handset.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Holding calls 228
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Routing calls
• Call Parking.........230
• DIA calls.........231
• Making a Priority call.........232
• Transferring a call.........233
• Transferring to a busy extension (Call Camping).........233
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Routing calls 230
Call Parking
Call Parking allows you to suspend a call so that someone else
can retrieve it from any telephone in the Compact Plus system.
You retrieve a parked call by dialling the retrieval code. As many
as nine calls can be parked at one time on the Compact Plus
system.
When you park a call, the system assigns one of nine codes for
retrieval of the call. These codes consist of the Call Parking
prefix, which may be any digit from 0 to 9, and a two-digit call
number between 01 and 09. For example, if the Call Parking
prefix is 4, the first parked call is assigned Call Parking retrieval
code 401.
The Compact Plus system assigns Call Parking codes in
sequence, from the lowest to the highest, until all the codes are
used. This round-robin approach means that a greater variety of
codes are used, which makes it easier for a call to reach the right
person when more than one incoming call is parked.
The highest call number (the Call Parking prefix followed by 09)
is used only by telephones or devices connected to the system
using an Analogue Terminal Adapter (integrated or external).
You programme the Call Parking prefix and the time delay before
parked calls are returned to the originating telephone. External
calls parked for longer than the programmed delay are returned to
the Prime extension.
Answered hunt group calls are parked in the same manner as
other calls.
Call Parking can be disabled by your system administrator.
Parking a call
1. While on a call, press ÄàÝ. The display shows
the Call Parking retrieval code.
2. Use Äßâ (the Page feature) or press PAGE to
announce the retrieval code displayed by your telephone.
Retrieving a parked call
1. Select an internal line on any Norstar telephone. (On the
M7100N telephone, pick up the handset.)
2. Dial the Call Parking retrieval code (the default retrieval
codes are 101 to 109).
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Routing calls 231
DIA calls
Direct Inward Access (DIA) allows BRA lines to use internal
lines to route incoming calls from the public exchange; the calls
pass directly to a Norstar extension without operator intervention.
The internal lines 101 to 140 between the Norstar CCU and the
extensions are called DIA lines.
BRA lines must have Answer Mode programmed to Auto for
DIA. Outgoing calls can also be made on auto-answer BRA lines
if they are assigned to a line pool or appear on an extension.
The Compact Plus system handles simultaneous calls on DIA
lines. The number of appearances of a DIA line on an extension
depends on the Line assignment setting for that extension.
If the DIA line is programmed to Appr&Ring or Appr only, then
the extension can have as many simultaneous DIA calls as there
are DIA key appearances. If the DIA line is programmed to Ring
only then the extension can have as many simultaneous DIA calls
as there are Intercom keys.
Number of appearances
The installer programs the number of appearances for each DIA
line assigned to the extension. When an extension with an
appearance of a DIA line answers a call, other extensions with
appearances of that DIA line do not track the state of that call. The
other extensions are free to receive additional calls on the DIA
line while the first call is still in progress.
By default the number of DIA line appearances is one. The
secondary appearance of a DIA line, is any appearance given to
an extension after the first appearance. There is a limit to the
number of secondary target line appearances in the system.
Automatically, the first DIA line (101) is assigned to the first
Start extension number of 5001, DIA line 102 is assigned to the
next extension number 5002, and so on. Also, the Received
numbers, as well as the Originating Line Identification number,
are automatically set to the extension number.
Received number
When the system automatically answers an incoming call on
auto-answer ISDN BRA lines, it matches these digits to a
Received number, and routes the call to the appropriate DIA line.
The installer programs the Received number length. A Received
number cannot be the same as another Received number or the
Auto number. It also cannot start with the same first digit as any
line pool code.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Routing calls 232
Busy tone for a Direct Inward Access line
You can program a DIA line to return busy tone or route a call to
the Prime extension for the line, if all extensions are busy.
When If busy is set to Busy Tone, the caller receives a busy tone.
When If busy is set To Prime the call is routed to the Prime
extension. If all intercom keys on the Prime extension are busy
the caller receives busy tone.
Busy tone with Do Not Disturb on Busy
When Do Not Disturb on Busy (DND) is turned on for an
extension, internal and network callers hear a busy tone. External
callers are transferred to the Prime extension.
If there are no available appearances of the DIA line and the DND
on busy feature is set to Yes for one of these extensions, the
second caller hears ring-back and the call is routed to the Prime
extension for the line.
If there are no available appearances of the DIA line and the DND
on busy feature is set to No on all extensions with an appearance
of the DIA line, the caller hears busy tone. When If busy is set to
Busy Tone the call is routed to the Prime extension if the DIA line
feature is set to Prime extension.
The If busy feature is a line feature and DND is an extension
feature. The If busy feature is activated when a call cannot ring at
any extension in the system.
The following table outlines the call scenarios when a DIA line is
busy, that is, there are no available appearances of the DIA line.
DND on busy
Yes
Yes
No
No
If busy
Busy Tone
Prime
Busy Tone
Prime
The caller
hears:
If Prime is Yes Ring-back, Ring-back, Busy Tone
call goes to call goes to
Prime
Prime
Ring-back,
call goes to
Prime
If Prime is No
Busy Tone
Busy Tone
Busy Tone
Busy Tone
Note: DIA does not apply to ISDN lines that are programmed as
manual answer lines.
Making a Priority call
If the administrator has allowed Priority call for your extension,
you can make an internal voice call when the Norstar telephone
you are calling is idle, busy, or has Do Not Disturb activated. If
you get a busy signal when you call someone in your office, you
can interrupt them. Use this feature for urgent calls only.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Routing calls 233
Press Äßá or press PRIORITY. Wait for a connection,
then speak.
Note: A person who receives a Priority call while they are on
another call has 8 seconds to accept or reject the call. If the
person does not take the call, the Priority call feature puts
their active call on Exclusive Hold and connects your call.
If Call Forward is active at the telephone you are trying to
reach, your call is forwarded.
If the telephone receiving the Priority call is in a
conference call, the other two parties are automatically put
on hold when the Priority call is accepted.
If the extension is a hunt group, the Priority call is rejected.
Transferring a call
You can transfer a call to any internal or external number.
Depending on how the installer has programmed your system,
you may not be able to transfer a call on one exchange line to
another exchange line.
1. Press Äàâ or press TRANSFER.
2. Call the person you want to transfer the call to.
3. If you want to talk to the person you are transferring the call
to, wait for them to answer before proceeding.
4. When you are ready to complete the transfer, press OK or hang
up. (You do not have to wait for the person to answer.)
You can cancel a transfer and re-connect with the party you are
attempting to transfer at any time before the transfer is complete.
1. Press Ä£àâ or press CANCL.
2. If you are not re-connected, press ¨ and then press the line
key of the original call, which is now on hold.
Transferring to a busy extension (Call Camping)
You can send an external call to another extension, even though
all of its lines are busy, by camping the call. The Call Camping
feature is useful for people who process many calls, such as
secretaries or receptionists.
1. After answering an external call, press Ä¡Û.
2. Dial the extension number that is the destination for the call.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Routing calls 234
Camped calls appear on a line key on the receiving telephone, if
one is available. If there is no line key available, you receive a
message on the display and hear camp tones. Each Norstar
telephone can handle only one camped call at a time.
Displays
21 Camp max
CALLBACK
You tried to camp a call to a telephone that
already has a camped call. The call has come
back to you. Press CALLBACK or the line key to
re-connect to the call. On the M7100N
telephone, just pick up the handset.
21 DND
CALLBACK
The person to whom you redirected a call has
Do Not Disturb activated. The call has come
back to you. Press CALLBACK or the line key to
re-connect to the call. On the M7100N
telephone, just pick up the handset.
Camp denied
You have tried to camp an internal call. You
can only camp external calls.
Camp to:
CANCEL
Dial the number of the internal telephone to
which the call is to be sent.
Camped: 21
CALLBACK
The telephone to which you camped a call did
not answer the call. The call has come back to
you. Press CALLBACK or the line key to
re-connect to the call. On the M7100N
telephone, just pick up the handset.
Line001 hung up
A call you camped has come back to you, but
the caller hung up before you could
re-connect.
Not in service
CALLBACK
The telephone to which you have camped a
call is out of service or is being used for
programming. The call has come back to you.
Press CALLBACK or the line key to re-connect to
the call. On the M7100N telephone, just pick
up the handset.
Release a call
The line that the camped call is on is in use, or
that line does not appear at your telephone.
Release the line or release an internal line.
Answering a camped call
While you are on a call, you hear a beep whenever there is a
camped call waiting. Press the flashing line key or intercom key
that the call is camped on. If your extension has no free lines,
finishing one of your active calls releases a line for the camped
call.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Making external calls
• Using an exchange code.........236
• Using line pools.........236
• Making a conference call.........237
• Using Class of Service passwords.........240
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Making external calls 236
Using an exchange code
You can access exchange lines to make external calls by using the
intercom key and dialling the exchange code (the default
exchange code is 9).
The exchange code is generally used to make external calls on the
M7100N telephone and on telephones connected to an Analogue
Terminal Adapter.
Using line pools
A line pool is a group of exchange lines that can be shared by
many telephones. You can use a line in a line pool to make an
external call.
The Compact Plus can have three line pools, and a telephone can
be programmed to access any of them.
A line pool access code is a number you dial to get a line pool.
The access code can be up to four digits long. You can have
several different line pools for your system, each one giving you
access to a different set of exchange lines. It is one way of sharing
lines across telephones in a system.
You programme the line pool access codes and give each
telephone access to a line pool.
Everyone in the office should have a list of the line pool access
codes for the line pools their telephones can use.
Using a line pool to make a call
1. Press ÄßÝ.
2. Enter a line pool access code.
If you have a free internal line, you can make a call using a line
pool without entering the feature code first.
1. Select an internal line (intercom).
2. Dial the line pool access code.
If no lines are available in the line pool, you can use Ring Again
at the busy tone. You are notified when a line in the line pool
becomes available. See ‘Using Ring Again’ on page 260.
Programming a memory key with a line pool feature code
When you programme a key with the line pool feature code, you
must enter a line pool access code after the feature code. The
programmed line pool key accesses a specific line pool, not the
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Making external calls 237
line pool feature. See ‘Using line pools’ on page 236 for more
information.
If you programme a key with an indicator to access a line pool
when all the lines in a line pool are busy, the indicator for the line
pool key turns on. The indicator turns off when a line becomes
available.
Making calls from an ISDN terminal
Note that ISDN terminals do not have line keys or intercom keys
as do Norstar telephones. To make an outgoing call from an ISDN
terminal, access an exchange line by entering a line pool code or
a destination code.
Making a conference call
You can share a call with two other people (internal or external)
by forming a conference. Once a conference is established, any
one of the parties can hang up, leaving the other two connected,
unless the two other parties are on exchange lines. In this case, if
the person who created the conference hangs up, the other two
parties may be disconnected, or they may remain connected
depending on the equipment in use.Your system may be
programmed to prevent connections between one exchange line
and another.
To establish a conference call with two other Norstar telephones,
a telephone must have two intercom keys assigned to it. The keys
appear starting at the lowest right-hand position, or one key above
that if the Handsfree feature is assigned to the telephone.
The M7100N telephone does not have keys for intercom key
assignment.
Forming a conference
1. Make or answer the call with the first party.
2. Place that call on hold.
3. Make the call to the second party.
4. Press ÄÜ.
5. Take the held call off hold. This is automatic on the M7100N
telephone.
Allowing a colleague to join your conference
Normally your calls are private.You can turn Privacy off for a call
allowing another person in your office with the same line to press
the line key and join in a conference or a two-way call.
1. While on a call, press Ä¡Ü.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Making external calls 238
2. Tell the other person to press the line key and join your
conversation.
Only two Norstar telephones in addition to the external caller can
take part in this kind of conference.
Disconnecting one person from the conference
You can disconnect one party from a conference and continue
talking to the other.
On an M7208N, M7310N, or M7324N telephone
1. Press the line key of the call that you want to disconnect. The
call that you want to keep is automatically put on hold.
2. Press ¨. The call is disconnected.
3. Press the line key of the held call to speak to the remaining
person.
On an M7100N telephone
1. Press Ä£Ü to place one caller on hold. Press
ú again to put the caller you want to keep on hold.
2. Press ¨. The call is disconnected.
3. Press ú to speak to the remaining party.
Using Hold on a conference
If you use Hold on a conference, you can
• put the two other people on hold (they cannot speak to each
other)
• put the conference on hold (the other two people can speak to
each other)
• put one person on hold while you continue to talk to the other
person
You can re-connect to the conference by pressing either of the
held line keys. For the M7100N telephone, press ú.
Separately holding two calls
For all Norstar telephones except the M7100N telephone, you can
put the two people in a conference call on hold independently so
that they cannot talk to each other.
1. Press the line key of one person. The other person is
automatically put on hold.
2. Press ú. The second person is put on hold.
You can re-establish the conference.
1. Take one call off hold.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Making external calls 239
2. Press ÄÜ.
3. Take the other call off hold.
Putting a conference on hold
You can put a conference on hold, allowing the other two people
to continue speaking to each other.
Press ú.
You can re-connect to the conference by pressing either of the
held line keys.
Splitting a conference
You can talk with one person while the other person is on hold.
On an M7000, M7208N, M7310N, or M7324N telephone:
Press the line key of the person you want to speak to. The other
person is automatically put on hold.
On an M7100N telephone:
1. Press Ä£Ü. The first party is on hold.
2. Press ú, if necessary, to switch parties.
Re-establishing the conference.
Press ÄÜ.
Removing yourself from a conference
You can remove yourself from a conference and connect the other
two callers through your Compact Plus system.
Press Äàâ (the Transfer feature code).
When you remove yourself from a conference using the Transfer
feature and both callers are from outside your system, one of the
callers must have called you on a disconnect supervised line, or
the call is disconnected.
Displays
3 parties only
P0905531 Issue 01
You are trying to add a fourth party to your
conference call or to join two conferences
together. Release one call from the conference
before adding another, or keep the two
conferences separate.
Conf. on hold
You have put a conference call on hold.
Conference busy
You have tried to make a conference call, but
your system is already handling its maximum
of four conference calls.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Making external calls 240
Line001 21
TRANSFER
You are on a conference with the two lines or
telephones shown. You can drop out of the
conference and leave the other two parties
connected (Unsupervised Conference) by
pressing TRANSFER or entering the Transfer
feature code.
Press held line
You have activated the Conference feature
with one call active and another on hold.
Press the line of the call on hold to bring that
person into the conference.
Using Class of Service passwords
Class of Service (COS) passwords permit controlled access to a
system’s resources by internal and remote users. When you enter
a COS password at a telephone, the restriction filters associated
with your COS password apply, rather than the normal restriction
filters. Similarly, when a remote user enters a COS password on
an incoming Auto-answer line, the restriction filters and remote
package associated with their COS password apply, rather than
the normal restriction filters and remote package. The COS
passwords are programmed by either your customer sales support
officer or installer.
Users should memorise their COS passwords instead of writing
them down. Employees’ COS passwords should be deleted when
they leave the company. Typically, each user has a separate
password. Several users can share a password or one user can
have several passwords.
Changing your COS password
You must enter a COS password each time you wish to make a
call that is normally restricted on a line or telephone.
Changing the restriction filters on a line or telephone
1. Press Äß¡.
2. Enter your six-digit COS password.
The COS passwords let you define individual passwords and
determine the restriction filters and remote package associated
with each.
If you use your Compact Plus system from outside the office, you
may have to enter a COS password to gain access to the system.
Displays
(Blank display) Enter your password. It is not
shown on the display.
Invalid Password
P0905531 Issue 01
You have entered a password that is not
programmed into your system.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Making internal calls
• Making an internal call.........242
• Making a conference call.........242
• Accessing a Direct-Dial extension.........242
• Leaving messages.........242
• Paging.........245
• Remote paging.........245
• Voice call.........246
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Making internal calls 242
Making an internal call
When you want to make or receive internal or private network
calls, make calls to hunt group extensions, or access exchange
lines through line pools, use Æ. A telephone may be
assigned up to eight intercom keys.
1. Press an intercom key or, on the M7100N, lift the handset.
2. Dial the extension number or a line pool access code.
Making a conference call
To establish a conference call with two other Norstar telephones,
a telephone must have two intercom keys assigned to it.
1. Make or answer a call with one extension.
2. Put the call on hold.
3. Press the remaining intercom key and dial the second
extension.
4. Press ÄÜ.
5. Press the held intercom key (step 2) to connect.
Accessing a Direct-Dial extension
Direct-Dial lets you dial designated telephones in your Compact
Plus system or private network with a single digit. You can have
one Direct-Dial extension in your Compact Plus system. A
person whose extension is a Direct-Dial extension is usually a
receptionist for your entire office or for a particular department.
To access the Direct-Dial extension, enter the Direct-Dial digit
(the default Direct-Dial number is 0).
Note that ISDN terminals cannot use the Direct-Dial digit to
reach a Direct-Dial extension.
Leaving messages
You can leave a message on the display of another telephone in
your Compact Plus system. Messages appear on the Norstar
telephone display informing the recipient to call the person who
sent the message. Messages can only be sent within the Compact
Plus system. The message sent reads MSG. Analogue telephones
attached to an ATA cannot receive messages, but can send them.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Making internal calls 243
Sending a message
1. Press ÄÚ.
2. On a telephone with a two-line display, press ADD. (This step
is not necessary on a telephone with a single-line display.)
3. Enter the extension number of the person you want to send the
message to. The person’s display shows MSG.
Cancelling a message
1. Press Ä£Ú.The display shows Cancel for:.
2. Enter the extension number of the person you sent the
message to.
Viewing received messages
You can receive up to four messages from different telephones.
On a telephone with a two-line display
1. Press MSG. The display shows nnn called (where nnn
represents the extension number of the caller).
2. Press NEXT to move through your messages.
On a telephone with a single-line display
1. Press ÄßÞ. The display shows the first message
you received.
2. Press ¥ or £ to move through your messages.
Replying to a message
You can call the person (or your voice message centre) who sent
a message while you are viewing the message.
On a telephone with a one-line display
Press â.
On a telephone with a two-line display
Press CALL.
If you wish to call your voice message centre using a line other
than the programmed line, exit your message list and dial the
voice message centre telephone number using normal dialling
methods.
Viewing the messages you have sent
On a telephone with a two-line display, you can view the
messages you have sent. You can send up to four messages to
different extensions. Each extension, including the prime
extension, can receive up to four messages from different
extensions, but only one message from any one extension.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Making internal calls 244
1. Press ÄÚ.
2. Press SHOW to display your first sent message.
3. Press NEXT to move through your sent messages.
Displays
Cancel denied
You have entered an invalid number when
attempting to cancel a message.
In use: 21
You are trying to call from your message
waiting list. The line that you are trying to use
is being used by the identified Norstar user.
Message denied
You have tried to send a message to an
invalid extension number or to a telephone
that is out of service.
Message list
SHOW ADD EXIT
SHOW appears only if you have outstanding
messages. Press SHOW to review messages you
have sent. Press ADD to send a new message.
Message to:
Enter the extension number of the telephone to
which you want to send a message.
Messages & Calls
MSG CALLS
You have one or more messages and one or
more new Call Logs. Press
Ä¡âß to change the first line of
the display to the current time and date.
No key free
You have no line key free with which to reply
to a message.
Start of list
NEXT
Your are at the beginning of your list of
messages. Press NEXT to move through your
messages.
Their list full
You are trying to send a message to a user
whose message waiting list is full.
Your list full
You have tried to send a message but your
telephone’s list of sent messages is full. Cancel
one of the messages you have sent, if
possible, or wait until you have received a
reply to one of those messages.
Erasing messages
You can erase a message while you are viewing it in your
message list.
On a telephone with a one-line display
Press ú.
On a telephone with a two-line display
Press ERASE.
The Direct-Dial extension can receive up to 4 messages and can
send up to 30 messages.
If your reply to a message is forwarded or is answered at another
extension using the Call Pickup feature, the message remains on
your extension until you cancel it or successfully contact the
extension that sent the message.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Making internal calls 245
Paging
Paging allows you to make announcements over the Compact
Plus system using the telephone speakers or your loudspeaker
system, if one is available.
The administrator can assign extensions to one of three page
zones.
Making a page announcement
1. Press Äßâ.
2. Choose a page type:
Ú or EXTNS through the telephone speakers (internal page)
Û or SPKR through an external speaker (external page)
Ü or BOTH for both internal and external (combined page)
3. If necessary, choose a zone (0 to 3).
4. Speak clearly into the handset and make your announcement.
5. Press ¨.
Paging shortcuts
Instead of entering the Page feature code followed by the page
type, you can enter the following shortcut codes:
• Internal (EXTNS)—ÄßÚ and zone (1 to 3)
• External (SPKR)—ÄßÛ (no zones)
• Combined (BOTH)—ÄßÜ and zone (1 to 3)
Remote paging
To use features on a Compact Plus system remotely, press ¥
followed by the feature code. Even if you are calling from another
Compact Plus system, press ¥ instead of Ä.
Making a remote page announcement
1. Dial the number to access your Compact Plus system.
2. Enter your Class of Service password.
3. Press ¥ßâ.
4. Choose a page type:
Ú or EXTNS through the telephone speakers (internal page)
Û or SPKR through an external speaker (external page)
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Making internal calls 246
Ü or BOTH for both internal and external (combined page)
5. If necessary, choose a zone (0 to 3).
6. Speak clearly into the handset and make your announcement.
7. Hang up.
Voice call
Voice call allows you to make a voice announcement or begin a
conversation through the speaker of one other telephone in the
Compact Plus system. The person you call hears a tone before
your voice call comes through.
Making a voice call
1. Press Äßß.
2. Dial the extension for the person you want to speak to.
3. Wait for the beep, then speak.
Muting voice call tones
When a voice call begins at your telephone, you hear a beep every
15 seconds as a reminder that the microphone is on.
To stop the beeping, pick up the handset or press ©.
Preventing voice calls to your telephone
You can use Voice Call Deny to prevent your telephone from
receiving voice calls.
Press Ä¡¡. Voice calls ring as do regular internal
calls. Your other calls proceed normally.
To cancel, press Ä£¡¡.
Answering a voice call without touching your telephone
If Handsfree Answerback is assigned to your telephone, you can
respond to a voice call without touching the telephone. Handsfree
Answerback is not available to the M7100N telephone.
When someone makes a voice call to you, simply start talking.
Your telephone’s microphone picks up your voice.
Once you have answered a voice call, you treat it as a normal call.
Displays
Dial voice call
P0905531 Issue 01
Dial the extension number or press the
internal autodial key of the person to whom
you want to speak.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Making internal calls 247
Microphone muted
Your Handsfree microphone is muted. Press
© or pick up your handset to
respond to the voice call.
No voice call
The telephone receiving the call cannot accept
voice calls for one of the following reasons: it
is active or ringing with another call; Call
Forward is turned on; Do Not Disturb is
turned on; Voice Call Deny is turned on; it is
not a Norstar telephone.
Your call proceeds automatically as a regular
ringing call.
Voice call
P0905531 Issue 01
The line is open for you to speak.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Making internal calls 248
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Forwarding calls
• Forwarding all calls.........250
• Line redirection.........252
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Forwarding calls 250
Forwarding all calls
You can temporarily forward your calls to another telephone in
the Compact Plus system by using the Call Forward All Calls
feature.
If the telephone to which you forwarded your calls does not have
the same exchange lines as your telephone, the forwarded calls
appear on intercom keys.
If a call is forwarded, it does not ring but the line indicator flashes
on your telephone. You can still answer the call by pressing the
key next to the flashing indicator.
If you are one of a group of people who regularly forward their
calls to one another, be aware that it is possible to set up loops
where a call is forwarded from one telephone to another in a
circle, but it is not answered anywhere.
1. Press ÄÝ.
2. Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to
forward your calls to. The display shows Forward>nnn.
To cancel, press Ä£Ý or press CANCEL.
Note: You can also set the system to forward your calls to
another telephone when your telephone is busy or is not
answered.
Note the differences between Line redirection and Call
Forward. Call Forward forwards all calls that arrive at
your telephone to another telephone within the Compact
Plus system. Line redirection redirects only the lines you
specify, no matter which telephones they appear on, to a
telephone outside the Compact Plus system. Line
redirection takes precedence over Call Forward.
Overriding Call Forward
If you telephone someone who has their calls forwarded to your
extension, your call rings at that person’s telephone. In this way
you can still communicate with the forwarded extension.
External Call forward
Users can set individual extensions to forward calls using Call Forward
All Calls (CFAC).
You can also program to enable extensions to automatically Forward
Busy (CFB) or Forward No Answer (CFNA).
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Forwarding calls 251
External Call Forward (ECF) is a feature that allows the same call
forwarding features to forward to external destinations. To allow ECF,
the individual extensions must:
•
have access to a line pool
•
be programmed to Allow Redirect: Y under
Terminals&Extns/Restrictions (extns).
ISDN and Network Call Diversion
On a Norstar system with ETSI ISDN lines, Call Forward features have
a slight variation in naming convention. The functions remain the same.
Features are labelled as follows:
•
Call Forward Unconditional (CFU)—implemented on Norstar
CFAC ÄÝ.
•
Call Forward on Busy (CFoB)—implemented on Norstar CFB.
•
Call Forward on No Response (CFNR)—implemented on Norstar
CFNA.
ISDN external lines use external Call Diversion if this is available from
the local exchange. If it is auto-invoked, see “Network Call Diversion”
on page 48.
User Programming
Users cannot program individual extensions for CFB or CFNA.
Users can program their own extension to CFAC, as follows:
Internal Call Forward—Press ÄÝ at any extension, followed
by the internal number to which you want calls forwarded.
External Call Forward—Press ÄÝ at any extension,
followed by the route or line-pool code number, and then the external
number.
Note: The destination or line pool code and dialing digits
cannot exceed 24 digits. The set must have access to a
line pool and be programmed to Allow Redirect: Y
under Terminals&Extns/Restrictions(extns) to
allow external destination programming
usingÄÝ.
Cancelling Call Forward
To cancel Call Forward, press Ä£Ý.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Forwarding calls 252
Line redirection
In a networked system, Line redirection lets you redirect calls
coming in on your external lines to a telephone outside the office.
You can redirect exchange lines to AC15A private circuits,
AC15A private circuits to either exchange lines or private
circuits, and exchange lines to exchange lines.
Compact Plus supports simultaneous redirection of DIA calls,
subject to the same barring rules and depending on the
availability of outgoing resources.
You may choose to redirect all your exchange lines or only some
of them. The incoming trunk must have disconnect supervision
and the outgoing trunk must be answer supervised for Line
Redirection to perform properly.
You cannot use the Line redirection feature code at either an
M7100N telephone or a telephone connected to an Analogue
Terminal Adapter.
You redirect lines at a telephone, but once redirected, the lines are
redirected for the entire system. You can only redirect lines for
which there are line keys on the telephone you are using.
How Line redirection is different from Call Forward
Call Forward forwards all calls that arrive at a particular
telephone to another telephone within the Compact Plus system.
Line redirection redirects only the lines you specify, no matter
which telephones they appear on, to a telephone outside the
Compact Plus system. Line redirection takes precedence over
Call Forward.
Using Line redirection
You redirect lines at a telephone, but once redirected, the lines are
redirected for the entire system.
You can only redirect lines that appear at line keys on your
telephone.
When redirecting DIA lines, ensure the outgoing resource is a
line pool with sufficient lines to support redirected traffic. The
number of appearances for a DIA line is not limited to the
number of appearances on that extension. As many DIA calls are
redirected as the outgoing resource permits.
You can answer the telephone if it rings while you are in the
middle of programming Line redirection, but none of the Norstar
call handling features are available until the feature times out. If
you need to use a Compact Plus feature to process the call, quit
Line redirection programming by pressing Ä. Do not
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Forwarding calls 253
press ¨ or you will disconnect the call you are trying to
process.
While you are programming Line redirection, you do not receive
any indication of calls that do not actually ring at your telephone.
Be careful to avoid redirection loops. If for example, you redirect
your lines to your branch office and your branch office redirects
its lines to you, you can create a redirection loop.
In certain situations, callers may experience lower volume levels
when you redirect calls to an external location.
Redirecting your lines
1. Press Ä¡Ý.
2. Select the outgoing line to be used for redirected calls.
3. Enter the number to which calls will be redirected by pressing
an external Autodial key or entering an external telephone
number (using no more than 24 digits), then pressing
ú or OK, or doing nothing (if the line you have
chosen as the outgoing line is a private network line that does
not require you to dial digits).
4. Select the lines to be redirected using ALL or individual line
keys.
5. Wait until the line indicators for the selected lines are lit, then
press ú or OK.
Note: If you press ú or OK before all the lines light up,
those lines not lit are not redirected.
The line chosen for redirecting calls on other lines can still be
used normally when it is not busy on a redirected call. To avoid
redirection failing because the chosen line is in use, choose a line
pool with several lines in it.
The system does not check that the number you give for Line
redirection is a valid one. If you redirect to an invalid number,
redirection fails. Using an Autodial key to enter the redirection
number helps avoid this possibility. An Autodial key used for
Line redirection must be programmed to use a specific line.
Cancelling Line redirection
1. Press Ä£¡Ý.
2. Select the lines you no longer want to be redirected.
If a telephone has Redirect ring enabled, it rings briefly for
redirected calls on one of its lines even if another telephone set up
the line redirection.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Forwarding calls 254
Displays while redirecting lines
You selected the intercom key as the facility to
Intercom
place the call on. Enter a line pool code or a
destination code.
Line redirection
QUIT ADD REMOVE
Press ¥ or ADD to begin redirection. Press £
or REMOVE to cancel a previous redirection.
No line to use
You have one exchange line on your
telephone, but you need a second line to
perform Line redirection. Redirect your
exchange line using a line pool as the
outgoing line.
Outgoing line
You are attempting to redirect a line and the
line you have chosen is the outgoing line you
have selected as a destination. You cannot
redirect a line to itself. Select another line.
Pool code: _
QUIT
Enter a valid line pool access code.
Redir by 221
OVERRIDE
You have attempted to redirect a line, but
someone else has already redirected that line.
Press ¥ or OVERRIDE to override the previous
redirection and redirect the line as you wish.
Redirect denied
You can only redirect calls on individual lines.
Select line out
QUIT
Select the line that will be used to redirect calls
out of the system.
Select line(s)
QUIT ALL
Press the lines to be redirected. To undo a line
selection, press it again. Press ALL to redirect
all your lines.
Select line(s)
ALL OK
Continue to press the lines to be redirected.
Press ú or OK when you are finished.
Unequipped line
The line you are attempting to redirect cannot
be redirected because the hardware does not
support redirection.
Displays while cancelling redirection
Press the lines that are no longer to be
Select line(s)
QUIT ALL
redirected. The lines light up as you press
them. Once you cancel redirection for a line,
you cannot restore it by pressing the line
again. Press ALL to cancel redirection for all
your lines. When you are finished, press
ú or OK.
Select line(s)
ALL OK
P0905531 Issue 01
Continue to press the lines that are no longer
to be redirected. Press ú or OK when
you are finished.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Saving time with features
• Using System Speed Dial.........256
• Using Autodial.........256
• Using Redial.........258
• Programming memory keys.........258
• Using Ring Again.........260
• Using Hotline.........260
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Saving time with features 256
Using System Speed Dial
Frequently dialled numbers can be programmed with System
Speed Dial codes so that they can be accessed quickly with a
two-digit code. After programming Speed Dial codes, distribute
a list of System Speed Dial codes for your office.
1. Press Äâ.
2. Enter the appropriate two-digit Speed Dial code (01 to 94).
Note: To programme Personal Speed Dial codes (71 to 94) at
your extension, see ‘Personal Speed Dial codes’ on
page 215
Using Autodial
You can programme memory keys for one-touch dialling of
internal or external telephone numbers.
Keys used for lines, answer or Handsfree/Mute cannot be used as
Autodial keys.
If the power to your Compact Plus system is off for more than
three days, Autodial numbers (as well as some other system
programming) may be lost from the memory.
Autodial key for an external number
1. Press Ä¥Ú. The display briefly shows Externl
autodial then Press a key.
2. Press the key you want to programme. (This step is not
necessary on the M7100N telephone which has only one
memory key.)
3. If you want this Autodial key to use a particular line or line
pool, select that line or line pool.
4. Enter the number. Press ú or OK when you are
finished. The display shows Programmed.
Autodial key for an extension number
1. Press Ä¥Û. The display briefly shows Internl
autodial then Press a key.
2. Press the key you want to programme. (This step is not
necessary on the M7100N telephone which has only one
memory key.) The display shows Extn#:_.
3. Enter the number. The display shows Programmed.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Saving time with features 257
Note: Autodial numbers must be programmed to memory keys
and not to line keys, intercom keys, the Handsfree/Mute
key, or Answer keys.
When programming a line pool as part of an Autodial
number, press Æ and enter the line pool access
code, or choose a programmed line pool key.
For the M7100N telephone, an external autodialler can only be
programmed using a line and not a line pool.
If you do not include a line selection in an Autodial number, the
call uses your Prime line (if you have one).
Using Intercom as the line for Autodial
If you press Æ as the line for an external Autodial
number, you must include a valid line pool access code or a
destination code. If line pool access codes or destination codes
are changed, remember to re-programme Autodial numbers as
well.
Displays
987_
QUIT BKSP OK
P0905531 Issue 01
Continue to enter digits until the number is
complete. Press à or BKSP to erase
an incorrect digit. Press ú or OK
when you are finished.
Autodial full
The memory allotted to Autodial numbers in
your Compact Plus system is full.
key erased
While programming external Autodial, you
erased the key by pressing ú or OK
before entering any digits.
Enter digits
QUIT OK
Enter the number you wish to programme
(choosing the line first if necessary) exactly as
you would if you were making a call.
Intercom #: _
QUIT
Enter the internal telephone number you wish
to programme.
Invalid number
You are programming an internal Autodial
key and have entered a number that is not an
extension number on your system. Enter a
valid extension number. If the number you are
entering is a destination code, use external
Autodial.
Press a key
QUIT
Press the memory key you want to
programme.
Program and HOLD
Enter the number you want to programme to
the key, then press ú.
Program and OK
QUIT OK
Enter the number you want to programme to
the key, then press ú or OK. You may
include a line or line pool selection in an
Autodial sequence by selecting the line before
entering any digits.
Programmed
The number is stored on the key.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Saving time with features 258
Feature moved
You have programmed an Autodial number
to a key that had a feature code programmed.
The feature has moved to another key. Use
Ä¥â(Key Inquiry feature) to
locate it.
Using Redial
You can save the number of any external call you dialled and call
it again later. You can also redial the last external number you
dialled.
Saving a number to redial later
While you are still on the call, press Äßà.
Saved Number Redial records a maximum of 24 digits.
Redialling a saved number
Press Äßà when you are not on a call.
If you have a programmed Saved Number Redial key, you can
use Ä¥â(Key Inquiry), then press the Last Number
Redial key followed by £ to check the last number before you
dial it.
Last Number Redial
Press ÄÞ.
Last Number Redial records a maximum of 24 digits.
If you have a programmed Last Number Redial key, you can use
Ä¥â (Key Inquiry), then press the Last Number
Redial key followed by £ to check the last number before you
dial it.
Programming memory keys
You can programme a feature code to a memory key. When this
guide tells you to enter a feature code, you can press the memory
key as a shortcut. In some cases, pressing the key a second time
cancels the feature.
Any memory key not programmed as an external or internal
target line, intercom, Answer key, or Handsfree/Mute key is
available for programming features.
You can erase a memory key; however, you cannot erase Answer,
Handsfree/Mute, Intercom, or line keys.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Saving time with features 259
You cannot programme the following feature codes to a memory
key:
• Long tones for signalling remote devices (see ‘Setting Long
tones’ on page 272)
•
Any code beginning with ¥ except Ä¥ÞâÚ
(Language Choice) and Ä¥à (Contrast
Adjustment).
When you programme a key with the line pool feature code, you
must enter a line pool access code after the feature code. The
programmed line pool key accesses a specific line pool, not the
line pool feature.
Programming a memory key
1. Press Ä¥Ü.
2. Press the key you want to programme with a feature. (This
step is not necessary on the M7100N which has only one
memory key.)
3. Enter the feature code you want to assign to the key.
Erasing a key
1. Press Ä¥Ú.
2. Press the feature key.
3. Press ú or OK to erase the key.
Displays
<Feature name>
SHOW OK
P0905531 Issue 01
The name of the feature assigned to a key is
displayed when you press the key. SHOW
appears when there is more information
available. Press £ or SHOW for additional
information.
Enter code:
If you are checking a Speed Dial key, enter
the two-digit Speed Dial code that you want to
check.
F_
QUIT CLEAR
Enter the feature code, or press ¨ or QUIT
to quit programming or CLEAR to clear the
numbers you have entered. The system
accepts the entry as soon as you enter a valid
feature code.
Feature code:
QUIT
Press Ä and enter the feature code
you want to assign to the key. You cannot
enter invalid codes.
Feature moved
You have programmed a key with a feature
that was already programmed to another key.
The feature has moved to the key you just
programmed. Its original key is now blank.
Press a key
EXIT
Press the key you want to check. Press
Ä or EXIT when you are finished.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Saving time with features 260
Program and HOLD
Enter the number you want to programme
and press ú. To erase the key, just
press ú.
Program and OK
QUIT OK
Enter the number you want to programme
and press OK. To erase the key, press
ú or OK.
Using Ring Again
If you cannot get through to someone on your Compact Plus
system because their telephone is busy or there is no answer, you
can use the Ring Again feature to tell you when they hang up or
next use their telephone. You can also use the Ring Again feature
to tell you when a busy line pool becomes available.
The Ring Again feature cannot be used with a hunt group.
1. Dial the extension number you want to reach.
2. Before you hang up, press ÄÛ.
Cancelling Ring Again
Press Ä£Û.
Displays
Can't ring again
Ring Again? YES
NO EXIT
You cannot use Ring Again on your current
call. You can only use Ring Again while you
have a busy signal on an internal call or line
pool request, or while an internal call is
ringing.
Press YES to use Ring Again. Press NO if you
prefer to send a message.
Using Hotline
Hotline
A Hotline telephone calls a pre-set internal or external telephone
number when you pick up the handset of a Hotline telephone (or
press ©).
Label the telephone to inform anyone using it that Hotline is
active.
Bypassing a Hotline
Press a line key, use the Pre-Dial or Automatic Dial feature, or
press © before you pick up the handset on a hotline
telephone. Refer to your Telephone Feature Card.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Using display features
• Time and Date.........262
• Static Time.........262
• Call Duration Timer.........262
• Call Information.........262
• Call Log.........264
• Autobumping.........269
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Using display features 262
Time and Date
The current time and date appear on the display of idle Compact
Plus telephones. Telephones connected to an Analogue Terminal
Adapter cannot display the time and date.
Checking the current time and date while on a call
You can briefly display the current time and date while you are on
a call by pressing Ä¡âÜ.
Static Time
When you have a message or a Call Log item on the telephone
display, the time and date are not shown. The Static Time feature
allows the time and date to be displayed at all times.
• Press Ä¡âß to turn Static Time on.
• Press Ä£¡âß to turn Static Time off.
Call Duration Timer
Use the Call Duration Timer feature to see how long you spent on
your last call or how long you have been on your present call.
By pressing Äàà, you can see how long
• you spent on your last call
• you have been on your present call
Displays
21 02:47
Line001 01:45
The display shows the last call you made or
the current call, and the total elapsed time in
minutes and seconds.
You parked your last call. The display shows
the length of time the call was parked. You
cannot see the length of time a call was
parked unless the call is active at your
telephone or has just been released by your
telephone.
Call Information
Call Information is an optional supplementary service provided
by the public telephone company. If your business subscribes to
this service, you can view the name, number, or both, of an
external caller unless the caller has blocked the information.
Lines in your Compact Plus system may appear at more than one
extension. However, only one extension can receive Call
Information automatically for an incoming call. You programme
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Using display features 263
which Norstar extension will automatically receive Call
Information. If Call Information is not delivered automatically to
your extension and your company subscribes to the service, you
can view Call Information using Ä¡ÚÚ (the Call
Information feature code).
ISDN terminals receive Call Information automatically if
supported by the terminal. Not all calls on ISDN lines necessarily
provide Call Information because of the way the call is routed, or
because the information was lost or corrupted. Call Information
gives you information about your active call or the highest
priority ringing call.
Call Information is more detailed than the Call Display
information you can receive without subscribing to Call
Information. For external calls, you can display the caller’s
telephone number, line name, or a combination of these items.
For an internal call, it is possible to display the caller’s name and
their extension number. It is also possible to display information
for ringing, answered, or held calls. Call Information displays
even if the call has been transferred, forwarded, or re-routed in
some way.
Call Log displays the same information as Call Information,
along with the date and time of the call, and the number of times
the caller called.
Note: You may continue to press line keys to get information on
other calls. If you press the same line key twice, you are
connected to that call. If you press any other key including
keys used to show more information about a call, you exit
the Call Information feature, and the key you pressed
performs its normal function.
Call Information symbols
Only incoming calls can be logged. Calls preceded by + are
outgoing and cannot be logged.
Symbol
P0905531 Issue 01
Description
+
Indicates the number of the telephone you called (not an
incoming call).
É
Press ¥ or VIEW to see the rest of the number.
ö
You cannot use another feature until you exit the Call
Information feature.
x
The number is incomplete (missing digits).
/
The number shown is too long. The last 14 digits are shown
following the /.
ø
The call shown in the Call Log has been answered.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Using display features 264
Call Log
If your system is equipped with the appropriate equipment and
you have subscribed to the Call Information feature supplied by
your service provider, you can capture information about
incoming callers in your Call Log. The same feature is supplied
by an ISDN service package that comes with Calling Line
Identification (CLID).
You can protect the privacy of your Call Log by assigning a
password. A handy feature of the Call Log is that you can easily
use it to place calls to the numbers recorded.
Call Log creates a record of incoming external calls. For each
call, the log could contain the following:
• sequence number in the Call Log
• number of the caller
• indication if the call was long-distance
• indication if the call was answered (and identity of who
answered it)
• time and date of the call
• number of repeated calls from the same source
• name of the line that the call came in on
Call Log can help you to
• keep track of abandoned or unanswered calls
• track patterns for your callers (for example, volume of calls
and geographical location of calls)
• record caller information quickly and accurately
• build a personal telephone directory from log items
The long-distance indicator, as well as the caller’s number, may
not be shown in the log, depending on the Call Display services
provided by your local telephone company and the caller’s local
telephone company.
Setting which calls are logged at an extension
You can set which types of incoming calls are logged at your
extension. The options are
• No autologging
• No one answered (only for autologging extensions)
• Unanswered by me (only for autologging extensions) but
answered elsewhere in the system
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Using display features 265
• Log all calls (including those you answer)—applies to all
lines capable of providing Call Information, even if your
extension is not assigned as an autologging extension for that
line
The default is No one answered.
1. Press Ä¥¡Ý.
2. Press £ or NEXT to change the options.
3. Press ú or OK to select the display option.
Setting your Call Log password
You can set a password for access to your Call Log to keep your
log private. From then on, you must enter this password to view
your Call Log.
1. Press Ä¥¡Þ. The displays shows
New passwrd:.
2. Enter your four-digit password. The display shows
Repeat New:.
3. Re-enter your four-digit password. The display shows
Password changed, which confirms that your password has
been assigned.
To enter Call Log using your password
1. Press Ä¡ÚÛ to enter the Call Log. If you have
programmed a password, the display shows Password:.
2. Enter your four-digit password.
If you forget your Call Log password, it can be removed in
programming.
Changing your Call Log password
1. Press Ä¥¡Þ. The display shows
Old passwrd:.
2. Enter your old password. The display shows New passwrd:.
3. Enter your new four-digit password. The display shows
Repeat New:.
4. Re-enter your password. The display shows
Password changed, which confirms that your password has
been changed.
Removing your Call Log password
When you remove your Call Log password, anyone can access
your Call Log.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Using display features 266
1. Press Ä¥¡Þ. The display shows
Old passwrd:.
2. Enter your old password. The display shows New passwrd:.
3. Press ú or OK. The display shows
No pswd assigned, which confirms that your password has
been deleted.
Logging an incoming call (Logit)
If your calls are not automatically logged, you can manually log
Call Information when you are connected to an external call.
Storing information for your current call can be helpful in many
situations. For example, you may want to
• record a caller’s name and number without using paper and
pencil
• record only calls that you choose, as opposed to using Call Log
automatically
• quickly record caller information before a caller hangs up.
To log an external call manually:
Press Ä¡ÚÜ.
Note: If you programme the Call Log feature code to a memory
key with an indicator, the indicator lights when there are
new items in the log.
Viewing your Call Log
New items are shown with the first character underlined.
Press Ä¡ÚÛ.
Use either the display keys or your keypad to navigate through
the log.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Using display features 267
Action
Key
Display key
On entering the log
View log items you have viewed before
¥
OLD
View the last item you viewed
â
RESUME
View new items in the log
£
NEW
View the next item in the log
£
NEXT
Erase the item you are viewing
ú
ERASE
View more information on this item
Right side of
Ã
MORE
Trim digits from the beginning of the number
you are viewing prior to dialling the number
Left side of
Ã
TRIM
Go back to the previous item
¥
When viewing an item
Placing a call to a number in the Call Log
You may find it helpful to place calls from within your Call Log.
The number stored for each call may vary depending on the type
of call. For example, if the call was placed from a Centrex or PBX
system, the first few numbers may need to be shortened before
you can make the call. If the number you want to call is
long-distance, or if you want to use a line pool, you may need to
add numbers.
To place a call
1. Display the log item for the call you want to place.
2. Display the associated telephone number.
3. Dial any extra digits required.
4. Press an exchange line or line pool key.
5. Lift the handset. (This is not necessary if Handsfree is
programmed at your telephone). The displayed number is
dialled.
While viewing the log, you can place a call to the number
displayed in the log.
1. If the number begins with digits that you do not need when
calling from your location, press the left side of Ã
or TRIM once for every digit that you want to remove.
2. Add any digits required to route this number to an appropriate
line (for example, 9 to get an outside line, if your system
requires it). Use the left side of à or BKSP to erase
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Using display features 268
incorrect digits. You cannot enter host system signalling
codes.
3. Select a line for the call as you normally would for making a
call of this type (for example, by pressing an appropriate line,
Intercom or Handsfree/Mute key, or by lifting the handset).
4. The displayed number is dialled.
Note: When you edit a number in the log to call that number, the
edits you make are not saved in the log.
Programming a telephone to log calls automatically
Your installer or sales support officer can programme each
telephone to log calls coming in on a line automatically.
Displays
1:Unknown number
P0905531 Issue 01
The caller’s number is unavailable.
12_1234567890123
NEXT ERASE MORE
_ indicates a new item.
12ø1234567890123
NEXT ERASE MORE
ø indicates that the call was answered.
12¤1234567890123
NEXT ERASE MORE
¤ indicates a long-distance call.
49/1234567890123
NEXT ERASE MORE
/ indicates that the stored number has been
shortened to its final 11 digits. Press
à or MORE to display additional
information about the call.
Call(s) bumped
One or more log entries have been deleted by
the Autobumping feature while you are
looking at the Call Log.
Hold or release
Hold or release your active call before
entering Call Log.
In use: SETNAME
The exchange line is in use.
Jan 4 9:00a 3X
NEXT ERASE MORE
The repeat call counter, shown along with
time and date, indicates the number of calls
you have received from the same caller.
Line001 ø227
NEXT ERASE MORE
This call was answered at another telephone
(227).
Line001 øLogit
NEXT ERASE MORE
This call was logged manually.
Line001
NEXT ERASE MORE
This call was not answered.
Messages & Calls
MSG CALLS
There are one or more items in your Message
Waiting list, and there are one or more new
items in your Call Log. Press
Ä¡âß to change the first line of
the display to the current time and date.
New calls begin
You have viewed your last old log item and
can now view your new log items.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Using display features 269
No info to log
No information is available for the call.
No log assigned
No log space has been assigned to the
telephone.
No resume item
The resume item has been removed because
of Autobumping. Repeat Call Update or log
reallocation while you are looking at the Call
Log.
Autobumping
Deleting log items
Your log has a set number of items that it can hold. When it
becomes full, new calls cannot be logged. When your log is full,
Autobumping automatically deletes the oldest Call Log item and
logs the new call.
To enable Autobumping
Press Ä¡ÚÞ. The display shows Autobump ON.
To disable Autobumping
Press Ä£¡ÚÞ. The display shows Autobump
OFF.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Using display features 270
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Special dialling features
• Special dialling features.........272
• Inserting a pause.........272
• Setting Long tones.........272
• Programmed Release.........273
• Recall.........273
• Run/Stop.........273
• Wait for Dial Tone.........274
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Special dialling features 272
Special dialling features
Norstar telephones can access a remote system or dial a number
on a private network by using host system access features such as
Recall, Pause, Wait for Dial Tone, and Run/Stop. These features
either send a special signal to the host system or allow you to
programme delays required by host systems to external Autodial
keys or Speed Dial codes.
Inserting a pause
The Pause feature enters a 3.5-second delay in a dialling sequence
on an exchange line. You may need this for signalling remote
devices, such as answering machines, or when dialling through to
PBX features or host systems.
You can programme more than one pause in an external Autodial
or Speed Dial sequence.
For pulse dialling, ¥ inserts a 1.5-second pause into the dialling
sequence.
The pause symbol (Ý) uses one of the 24 spaces in a dialling
sequence.
Press Äà¡ while programming a dialling sequence.
Note: You can obtain a pause with one key press if you
programme the feature code to a memory key. More than
one pause can be programmed to an external Autodial key.
Setting Long tones
The Long tones feature lets you control the length of a tone so that
you can signal devices such as fax or answering machines, which
require tones longer than the standard 120 milliseconds.
1. While on a call, press Ä¡â¡.
2. Use the keypad to produce the appropriate tones. Each tone
sounds for as long as you hold down the key.
Note: Long tones can be used on any call except a conference
call.
You can use internal lines of the Compact Plus system to
activate a device connected to an Analogue Terminal
Adapter (ATA) in another area of your office or to
exchange lines to access devices outside the Compact Plus
system.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Special dialling features 273
Programmed Release
The Programmed Release feature performs the function of the
¨ key in a programmed dialling sequence. When the system
encounters a Programmed Release in a dialling sequence, it stops
dialling and hangs up the call.
The Programmed Release symbol (Þ) takes up2 of the 24 spaces
in a programmed dialling sequence.
The system ignores any digits or commands that follow a
Programmed Release in a programmed dialling sequence.
Press Ä¥¡á while programming a dialling
sequence.
Recall
If your Compact Plus system is connected to a PBX, you can use
a Recall signal to access special features. Programme Recall to a
memory key for one-touch access.
The Recall signal can also be included as part of a longer stored
sequence on an external Autodial key or in a speed dial code. The
Recall symbol (Û) uses 2 of the 24 spaces in a dialling sequence.
If your Compact Plus system is connected to a host system, a
private branch exchange (PBX) for example, you can use a Recall
signal to access special features such as PBX Call Forward and
PBX Transfer.
While you are on a call or programming an Autodial key, press
ÄàÚ.
Run/Stop
Run/Stop inserts a break point into an Autodial or Speed Dial
number. This may be necessary when you are connecting to a
PBX or similar host system.
For example, you may call a company with an automated
receptionist that instructs you to dial the extension number you
need. You can programme the company number, a Run/Stop, then
the extension number on one external Autodial key. Press the
Autodial key once to dial the company number. When you hear
the automated receptionist, press the Autodial key again to dial
the extension number.
The Run/Stop symbol (ß) uses 1 of the 24 spaces in an Autodial
or Speed Dial sequence.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Special dialling features 274
You can include up to three Run/Stop commands in a dialling
string. The system ignores a fourth Run/Stop, and any digits or
commands that follow it in a programmed dialling sequence.
Press Ä¥á while programming a dialling sequence.
Wait for Dial Tone
Wait for Dial Tone causes a sequence of numbers to pause until
dial tone is present on the line before continuing to dial. This is
useful if you must dial a remote system and then wait for dial tone
from that system before dialling the rest of your number.
The Wait for Dial Tone symbol (à) uses 2 of the 24 spaces in an
Autodial or Speed Dial sequence.
1. Press Ä¡âÝ while programming a dialling
sequence.
Displays
Invalid code
You have entered a code that can only be
used in a programmed Autodial or Speed
Dial sequence, not on a call you dial directly.
Programmed Release and Run/Stop are for
use in programmed dialling sequences only.
Using pulse dialling for a call
If your external telephone lines use pulse dialling, you can
temporarily switch to tone dialling by pressing £ after selecting
the line. Tone dialling lets your Norstar telephone communicate
with devices and services that respond to tone signals, such as
automatic switchboards and fax or answering machines.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)
• ISDN services.........276
• Digital Network Adapter.........278
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) 276
ISDN services
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) provides a fast,
accurate, and reliable means of sending and receiving data,
image, text, and voice information through the telephone system.
The Compact Plus system can support up to two Basic Rate
Interface (BRI) cards, each of which allows the connection of up
to four BRI loops. Each of these loops consists of two separate
B-channels that can be used to make two simultaneous voice or
data calls, or one data call and one voice call. A video call
requires the use of both B-channels on the loop. Your installer
configures the BRI loops for the Compact Plus system.
ISDN applications
Using the appropriate ISDN terminal equipment, you can access
a wide range of business applications.
Videoconferencing and video telephony
Videoconferencing offers instant visual and audio contact
between distant parties using either studio-based or desktop
ISDN terminals.
Desktop conferencing
ISDN allows computer users in distant locations to share and edit
any image, data, or text file on their own computer screen, while
simultaneously discussing the information.
File transfer
ISDN allows you to transfer files containing data, text, image, or
audio clips, faster and cheaper than with a conventional modem.
Home working
Convenient retrieval, processing, and storage of files is possible
for the home worker, using ISDN lines to give high-speed access
to information held in the office.
Group 4 fax
ISDN fax applications pride cost savings by increasing
transmission speed and quality of resolution.
Remote LAN access
ISDN provides an affordable and fast means for workers in
remote sites (at home or branch offices) to access local-area
networks (LANs).
Leased circuit back-up
Essential back-up for leased KiloStream circuits can be provided
using ISDN as required, rather than duplicating costly permanent
circuits.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) 277
LAN to LAN bridging
LAN bridge/routers allow flexible interconnection between
LANs using ISDN, with charges only incurred when information
is actually transmitted.
Broadcasting
Using ISDN and digital codecs, broadcasters can convey music,
news, and commentaries with absolute clarity.
Video surveillance
Dial-up access using videocodecs provides advanced
surveillance on demand.
Accessing information services
The fast call set-up and high bandwidth of ISDN are ideal for
accessing information services such as Internet and databases.
ISDN supported services
Compact Plus supports the following ISDN services:
• basic incoming calls
• basic outgoing calls
• Direct Inward Access
• Calling Line Identification presentation
• Multiple Subscriber Numbering
• sub-addressing
• bearer capabilities
• teleservices
The Call Forward All Calls and Transfer features can be used
from ISDN terminals connected to Compact Plus.
Note that Norstar extensions can accept voice calls only. Video
and data calls do not alert at a Norstar extension.
Although an ISDN S-loop can support up to eight devices, the
loop has a limit of two B-channels. An ISDN data or voice
terminal uses one B-channel for an incoming or outgoing call. An
ISDN video terminal uses two B-channels for an incoming or
outgoing call. If both B-channels are in use, other devices on that
loop cannot make or receive calls until a B-channel is available,
or until both B-channels are available in the case of a video
terminal. Thus, the number of terminals installed on an S-loop
must take into account whether you require dedicated access for
the terminals on that loop.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) 278
Services not available
Compact Plus does not support the following ISDN services:
• Terminating Line Identification
• Three-Party Service
• Malicious Call Identification
• Incoming/Outgoing Calls Barred Service
• Night Busy
• Fixed Destination
• Administration Controlled Call Diversion
• Reasons for Release
• Separate Channel Numbering
Note that Norstar extension features, other than Transfer and Call
Forward All Calls, are not available to ISDN terminals. In
addition, you cannot retrieve a parked call, or reach a Direct-Dial
extension by using the Direct-Dial digit from an ISDN terminal.
Digital Network Adapter
The Digital Network Adapter (DNA) is an optional device for use
with the Compact Plus CCU. It provides an integrated desktop
solution for voice, data, and Computer Telephony Integration
(CTI) services. You can also telecommute over a digital
telephone line to access high-speed network features from your
home by connecting to a DNA in your office. The DNA serves as
a terminal adapter (TA) and provides reliable high-speed end-toend digital connectivity between a personal computer and a
remote data server through the CCU and public network.
The DNA uses standard communication protocols such as Pointto-Point (PPP) and Multi-link PPP (MP) in applications such as
Internet access and remote LAN access.
A Norstar telephone can also be connected to a DNA, to access
Norstar voice services. You can have a conversation at the same
time that your computer is connected to the Internet or remote
LAN, with no loss of CCU features.
This sharing of voice and data communication is made possible
by software in the CCU that provides dynamic bandwidth
allocation across the two channels of the connection. What this
means is both channels are used for data traffic. When you use the
telephone that is connected to the DNA, one channel of the
connection is for the voice conversation, while the data
connection continues on the other channel. When the voice call
ends, the extra bandwidth is once again available to the data
traffic.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Feature quick reference
• Compact Plus feature codes.........280
• ISDN terminal features.........283
• ATA extension features.........284
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Feature quick reference 280
Compact Plus feature codes
Using Norstar features
1. Press Ä and enter the desired feature code on the
keypad.
OR
Press the programmed memory key.
2. Follow the display messages.
If you change your mind while entering a feature code, press
Ä to cancel. If you use the ¨ key to end a feature,
you may drop an active call.
To display what has been programmed on a memory key, enter
Ä¥â (the Key Inquiry feature code) and press the
memory key.
Note that Norstar extensions can accept voice calls only. Video
and data calls do not alert at a Norstar extension.
Feature
Autobumping (Call Logs)
To activate
Ä¡ÚÞ
To cancel
Ä£¡ÚÞ
Auto Attendant
Custom Call Routing (CCR)
Ä¥¡ÜÛ
Greetings
Ä¥¡ÜÜ
System Answer
Ä¥¡ÜÚ
Background music
Ä¡ß
Call Camp-on
Ä¡Û
Call Duration Timer
Äàà
Call Forward All Calls
ÄÝ
Call Log
Ä¡ÚÛ
Call Log options
Ä¥¡Ý
Call Log password
Ä¥¡Þ
Call Parking
ÄàÝ
Call Pickup Directed
Äàß
Call Pickup Group
ÄàÞ
Call Queuing
Ä¡âÚ
Class of Service password
Äß¡
Conference
ÄÜ
Contrast adjustment
Ä¥à
Dialling modes
Ä¥¡Û
P0905531 Issue 01
Ä£¡ß
Ä£Ý
¨
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Feature quick reference 281
Feature
To activate
To cancel
Do Not Disturb
Ä¡Þ
Ä£¡Þ
Group listen
Ä¡âÛ
Ä£¡âÛ
Hold
ú
Holding a call exclusively
Äàá
Key Inquiry
Ä¥â
Last Number Redial
ÄÞ
Line pools
ÄßÝ
Line redirection
Ä¡Ý
Ä£¡Ý
(not available on M7100N)
Logit (Call Logs)
Ä¡ÚÜ
Long tones
Ä¡â¡
Memory keys
Programming
Ä¥Ü
or Ä¥Û
or Ä¥Ú
Erasing
Ä¥Ú then OK
Messages
Reply
ÄßÞ
Ä£ßÞ
Sending
ÄÚ
Ä£Ú
View messages
ÄßÞ
Moving line keys
Ä¥¡Ú
¨
Page
General
Äßâ
Internal
ÄßÚ
External
ÄßÛ
Internal and external
ÄßÜ
Pause
Äà¡
Priority call
Äßá
To block a Priority call
Ä¡Þ
Privacy
Ä¡Ü
Programmed Release
Ä¥¡á
Recall
ÄàÚ
Ring Again
ÄÛ
Ring Type
Ä¥ß
P0905531 Issue 01
Ä£¡Ü
Ä£Û
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Feature quick reference 282
Feature
To activate
Ring Volume
Ä¥¡â
Run/Stop
Ä¥á
Saved Number Redial
Äßà
To cancel
Services
Ringing service
Ä¡àÚ
Ä£¡àÚ
Restriction service
Ä¡àÛ
Ä£¡àÛ
Routing service
Ä¡àÜ
Show Time and Date
Ä¡âÜ
Static Time
Ä¡âß
Move clock forward by 1 hour
Ä¥¥ÜáÜ
Move clock back by 1 hour
Ä¥¥ÛÛÛÞ
Ä£¡âß
Speed Dial
Making a call
Äâ
Storing a Speed Dial code
Ä¥Ý
Transfer
Äàâ
Transfer to I-RAD
Ä¡ Úà
Trunk Answer
Ä¡ââ
Voice call
Äßß
Voice Call Deny
Ä¡¡
Wait for Dial Tone
Ä¡âÝ
P0905531 Issue 01
Ä£àâ
Ä£¡¡
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Feature quick reference 283
ISDN terminal features
The Call Forward All Calls and Transfer features can be used
from an ISDN terminal connected to Norstar. On most ISDN
terminals, you need to press one or more keys to access feature
services before you enter the feature code for these features. To
see what keys to press, consult the instructions that came with the
ISDN terminal.
Note: Although ISDN terminals may have Transfer and Call
Forward keys or display prompts, these keys do not
activate Compact Plus features. Always use the
appropriate procedure to access feature services, then
enter the feature code as described below.
Other Norstar extension features are not available to ISDN
terminals. In addition, you cannot retrieve a parked call or use the
Direct-Dial digit to reach a Direct-Dial extension from an ISDN
terminal.
Call Forward All Calls
Using the Call Forward All Calls feature
The Call Forward All Calls feature lets you forward your calls to
another telephone in your Compact Plus system.
1. Press ¥Ý¥.
2. Enter the number of the extension you want your calls
forwarded to, followed by £.
3. Enter the appropriate key to send.
Cancelling Call Forward
1. Press £Ý£.
2. Enter the appropriate key to send.
Transfer
Using the Transfer feature
The Transfer feature lets you transfer a call to an internal or
external telephone. Depending on how you have programmed
your system, you may not be able to transfer a call on one
exchange line to another exchange line.
Depending on the type of ISDN terminal, you may have to press
a service key to access feature services (consult the instructions
that came with your ISDN terminal).
1. Press ¥àâ¥.
2. Enter the number of the extension you want to transfer the call
to, followed by £.
3. Enter the appropriate key to send.
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Feature quick reference 284
Cancelling Transfer
Depending on the type of ISDN terminal, you may have to press
a service key to access feature services (consult the instructions
for your terminal).
1. Press £àâ£.
2. Enter the appropriate key to send.
Line access from an ISDN terminal
Note that ISDN terminals do not have line keys or intercom keys
as does a Norstar telephone. To make an outgoing call from an
ISDN terminal, access an exchange line by entering a line pool
code or a destination code.
Making or receiving calls involving two B-channels
For incoming calls that require two simultaneous B-channels,
Compact Plus requires that calls be made sequentially to two
distinct numbers, rather than simultaneously to the same number.
In the case of a DIA call, the same DIA line can be used but the
ISDN extension needs to have the number of appearances for that
DIA line to 2.
For example, in the case of a Presence video terminal, the first
call establishes a 1B video connection and the second call
establishes the 2B video connection.
ATA extension features
The Analogue Terminal Adapter (ATA) connects a digital Norstar
telephone port to a standard analogue voice device. It is most
commonly used to attach to a single-line telephone or a data
communication device such as a modem or facsimile machine.
Refer to the ATA Terminal Feature Card for complete
information.
Feature
To activate
Alternate line
ûÛ
Call Forward
û¥Ý
Call parking
û¥àÝ
Call pick-up (Directed)
û¥àß
Call pick-up (Group)
û¥àÞ
Call Queuing
û¥¡âÚ
Call Waiting
û¥¡âÚ
Camp-on
û¥¡Û
P0905531 Issue 01
To cancel
û£Ý
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Feature quick reference 285
Feature
To activate
Conference call
û¥Ü
Hold Call (Exclusive)
û¥àá
Hold Call (Public)
ûÛ
Last Number Redial
û¥Þ
Line Pool selection
û¥ßÝ
To cancel
Page
General
û¥ßâ
Intercom
û¥ßÚ
External
û¥ßÛ
Intercom/External
û¥ßÜ
Priority call
û¥ßá
Privacy control
û¥¡Ü
Reach through
Recall
û¥àÚ
Pause
û¥à¡
Timed release
û¥àÛ
Restriction override
û¥ß¡
Ring Again
û¥Û
Saved Number Redial
û¥ßà
Send Message
û¥Ú
û£Û
û£Ú
StarTalk or
Norstar Voice Mail
Access mailbox
û¥á¡Ú
Leave a message
û¥á¡â
System Speed Dial
û¥â
Tones
û¥¡âá
Transfer
û¥àâ
Trunk Answer from any
telephone
û¥¡ââ
Voice call
û¥ßß
P0905531 Issue 01
û£¡âá
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Feature quick reference 286
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Appendix A: Programming overviews
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
288 Appendix A: Programming overviews
Chart 1: System Speed Dial
Sys speed dial
SHOW
Speed dial #: __
SHOW
Use prime line
SHOW
Display digits:
Enter a System Speed Dial number 01 to 70.
The number is displayed. Press NEXT.
Press CHANGE to select outgoing facility:
Use prime line
Use line: ___ (enter line)
Pool code: __ (enter pool access code)
Use routing tabl
Press CHANGE to choose between Y (Yes) and N (No).
NEXT
Appears only if Display digits is set to N (No).
Enter a name.
Name:
NEXT
Bypass restr'n:
Press CHANGE to choose between Y (Yes) and N (No).
Chart 2: Naming extensions
Terminals&Extns
SHOW
Show extn#:
Enter extension number.
SHOW
Line
access
NEXT
Capabilities
NEXT
Name:
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Press CHANGE and enter new name. Press NEXT.
P0905531 Issue 01
Appendix A: Programming overviews 289
Chart 3: Naming lines
Lines
SHOW
Enter line number.
Show line:
SHOW
Press CHANGE and enter new name.
Name:
Chart 4: Time and Date
Time&Date
SHOW
Press CHANGE and enter hour (2 digits).
If between 00 and 12, select AM or PM.
Hour:
NEXT
Minutes:
Press CHANGE and enter minutes (00-59).
NEXT
Press CHANGE and enter year (2 digits).
Year:
NEXT
Month:
Press CHANGE and enter month (01-12).
NEXT
Day:
P0905531 Issue 01
Press CHANGE and enter day (01-31).
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
290 Appendix A: Programming overviews
Chart 5: Direct-Dial
System prgrming
SHOW
Hunt groups
NEXT
Featr settings
NEXT
Direct-dial
SHOW
D-Dial 1:
Press CHANGE to select Intrnl, Extrnl, or None.
SHOW
Intrnl#:
If Intrnl or Extrnl #, press CHANGE and enter number.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Appendix A: Programming overviews 291
Chart 6: Restriction filters
Restrictions
SHOW
Restrn filters
SHOW
Show filter:_
Enter a restriction filter number (01 to 99).
SHOW
Restrn flt:nn
SHOW
Restrn nn:
SHOW
No restrictions
ADD
Rest'n# 01:
SHOW
Enter digits to be restricted. Press OK.
Press ADD to add more restrictions to this filter.
Press REMOVE to remove a restiction from this
restriction.
Deny:#
NEXT
No overrides
ADD
Override 001:
P0905531 Issue 01
Enter digits to be excluded from this restriction.
Press ADD to add more overrides to this restriction.
Press REMOVE to remove an override from this
restriction.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
292 Appendix A: Programming overviews
Chart 7: Remote Access Packages
System
prgrming
SHOW
Hunt groups
NEXT (4 times)
Remote access
SHOW
Rem access pkgs
NEXT
Rem line access
≠
≠
Press
and enter pkg#.
Press
to see settings: LinePool access,
Remote page, Remote admin, and Remote monitor.
Press CHANGE to choose between Y (Yes) and N (No).
Press
and enter line number.
Press CHANGE and enter remote package number.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Appendix A: Programming overviews 293
Chart 8: Extension restrictions
Terminals&Extns
SHOW
Show extn#:_
Enter extension number.
SHOW
Line access
NEXT
Capabilities
NEXT (3 times)
Restrictions
SHOW
Restrn filters
NEXT
Extn restrn
SHOW
Filters
NEXT
ExtnLock:
NEXT
Allow last no:
NEXT
Allow saved no:
Press CHANGE to select None, Full, or
Partial.
Press CHANGE to choose between Y (Yes)
and N (No).
Press CHANGE to choose between Y (Yes)
and N (No).
NEXT
Allow recall:
NEXT
Allow redirect:
P0905531 Issue 01
Press CHANGE to chooose between Y (Yes) and N (No).
Press CHANGE to choose between Y (Yes) and N (No).
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
294 Appendix A: Programming overviews
Chart 9: Extension capabilities 1
Terminals&Extns
SHOW
Show extn#:_
Enter extension number.
SHOW
Line access
NEXT
Capabilities
SHOW
Fwd no answer
≠
Press
to see the setting.
Press CHANGE to enter an extension number.
NEXT
Forward delay
(If Fwd no answer is set to an extension)
Press CHANGE to select 2, 3, 4, 6, or 10 rings.
HEADING
Fwd no
on answer
busy:
NEXT
Fwd on busy
≠
Press
to see the setting.
Press CHANGE to enter an extension number.
NEXT
DND on busy:
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Press CHANGE to choose between Y (Yes)
and N (No).
P0905531 Issue 01
Appendix A: Programming overviews 295
Chart 10: Extension capabilities 2
Terminals&Extns
SHOW
Enter extension number.
Show extn#:_
SHOW
Line access
NEXT
Capabilities
SHOW
Fwd no answer
NEXT (3 times)
Handsfree:
Press CHANGE to select None, Auto, or Std.
NEXT
HF answerback:
Press CHANGE to choose between Y (Yes)
and N (No).
NEXT
Pickup grp:
Press CHANGE to select None, 1, 2, 3, or 4.
NEXT
Press CHANGE to select None, 1, 2, or 3.
Page zone:
NEXT
Paging:
P0905531 Issue 01
Press CHANGE to choose between Y (Yes)
and N (No).
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
296 Appendix A: Programming overviews
Chart 11: Extension capabilities 3
Terminals&Extns
SHOW
Show extn#:_
Enter extension number.
SHOW
Line access
NEXT
Capabilities
SHOW
Fwd no answer
NEXT (8 times)
D-Dial:
Press CHANGE to choose between Extn1
and None.
NEXT
Priority call:
Press CHANGE to choose between Y (Yes)
and N (No).
NEXT
Hotline:
Press CHANGE to select None, Intrnl#,
or Extrnl#.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Appendix A: Programming overviews 297
Chart 12: Extension capabilities 4
Terminals&Extns
SHOW
Show extn#:_
Enter extension number.
SHOW
Line access
NEXT
Capabilities
SHOW
Fwd no answer
NEXT (11 times)
Aux. ringer:
Press CHANGE to choose between Y (Yes)
and N (No).
NEXT
Redirect ring:
Press CHANGE to choose between Y (Yes)
and N (No).
NEXT
Receive tones:
Press CHANGE to choose between Y (Yes)
and N (No).
NEXT
ATA settings
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
298 Appendix A: Programming overviews
Chart 13: User preferences
User prefernces
SHOW
Model
Press
≠
to see the setting.
Press
≠
to see settings.
NEXT
Key prgrming
NEXT
User speed dial
Press
≠
to see speed dial codes.
NEXT
Call log opt'ns
Press
to see settings. Press CHANGE to
select from No one answered, Unanswerd by me,
Log all calls, and No autologging.
≠
NEXT
Dialling opt'ns
Press
to see settings. Press CHANGE to
select from Automatic dial, Standard dial,
and Pre-Dial.
≠
NEXT
Language
Press CHANGE to choose between English and Opratng.
NEXT
Press CHANGE to select level.
Display cntrst:
NEXT
Ring type:
Press CHANGE to select ring type (1-4).
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Appendix A: Programming overviews 299
Chart 14: Extension relocation
System
prgrming
SHOW
Hunt groups
NEXT
Featr settings
SHOW
Backgrnd music
NEXT (17 times)
Extn relocatn
Press CHANGE to choose between Y (Yes) and N (No).
Chart 15: Copying settings
Terminals&Extns
SHOW
Show extn#:_
Enter extension number.
221:221
Press COPY
Copy:SYSTEM data
Press CHANGE to choose between SYSTEM data
and SYSTEM+USER.
NEXT
COPY:SINGLE
Press CHANGE to select SINGLE, RANGE, or ALL.
NEXT
Copy to:
P0905531 Issue 01
(If SINGLE or RANGE is selected)
enter extension number(s) as prompted.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
300 Appendix A: Programming overviews
Chart 16: ATA settings
Terminals&Extns
SHOW
Show extn#:_
Enter extension number for the ATA or I-ATA .
SHOW
Line access
NEXT
Capabilities
SHOW
Fwd no answer
NEXT (14 times)
ATA settings
SHOW
ATA ans timer:
Press CHANGE to select 3, 5, 7, or 10 seconds.
NEXT
ATA mode:
Press CHANGE to choose between Tone and Pulse.
NEXT
Press CHANGE to choose between Y (Yes) and N (No).
ATA tones:
NEXT
ATA use:
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Press CHANGE to choose between On-site
and Off-site.
P0905531 Issue 01
Appendix A: Programming overviews 301
Chart 17: Ringing service
Services
SHOW
Ringing service
SHOW
Ringing groups
NEXT
Sched:Night
SHOW
Service:
Press CHANGE to select from Manual,
Auto, and Off.
Chart 18: Restriction service
Services
SHOW
Ringing service
NEXT
Restrn service
SHOW
Sched:Night
SHOW
Service:
P0905531 Issue 01
Press CHANGE to select from Manual,
Auto, and Off.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
302 Appendix A: Programming overviews
Chart 19: Routing service
Services
SHOW
Ringing service
NEXT (2 times)
Routing service
SHOW
Routes
NEXT
Dest codes
NEXT
Sched:Night
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Press CHANGE to select from Manual,
Auto, and Off.
P0905531 Issue 01
Appendix A: Programming overviews 303
Chart 20: Passwords
Passwords
SHOW
COS pswds
NEXT
≠≠
(Appears only if using SAPLUS password).
Press
and enter password #.
Then press
to enter new password.
Call log pswds
NEXT
Progrming pswds
SHOW
SysCoord+:
(Appears only if using SAPLUS password).
Press CHANGE to enter new password.
NEXT
Sys coord:
Press CHANGE to enter new password.
NEXT
Press CHANGE to enter new password.
Basic:
HEADING
Progrming pswds
NEXT
IRAD pswd
P0905531 Issue 01
Press CHANGE to enter new password.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
304 Appendix A: Programming overviews
Chart 21: Call Log passwords
Passwords
SHOW
COS pswds
NEXT
Call log pswds
SHOW
Show extn#:
Enter extension number.
SHOW
Log pswd:
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Press CHANGE to reset password to None.
P0905531 Issue 01
Appendix A: Programming overviews 305
Chart 22: Call Services
Terminals&Extns
SHOW
Show extn#:_ _ _
Enter extension number.
SHOW
Line access
NEXT
Capabilities
NEXT (4 times)
Call services
SHOW
Auto call info
NEXT
1stDisplay
Press CHANGE to choose between Numbr and Line.
NEXT
Auto Called ID:
Press CHANGE to choose between Y (Yes)
and N (No).
NEXT
Log space
P0905531 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
306 Appendix A: Programming overviews
Chart 23: Auto Attendant
System prgrming
SHOW
Hunt groups
NEXT (3 times)
Auto Attendant
SHOW
Auto Attend
NEXT
Attd Extn:
NEXT
System answer
NEXT
Press CHANGE to enter new extension number.
≠
≠
Press
to see the setting for After:.
Press CHANGE to select number of rings (2 to 12).
Press
to see the setting for After:.
Press CHANGE to select number of rings (2 to 12).
CCR
NEXT
CCR lines
NEXT
CCR groups
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
≠
Press
and enter group number.
Press
to see extensions in group.
Press CHANGE to choose between Assigned and
Unassgnd.
P0905531 Issue 01
Index 307
Index
A
AbsorbLength 154
AC15A
assigning a filter 83
Administration password
erasing 161
setting up 161
Advice Line 30
Alarm extension 130
Analogue equipment
settings 140
Analogue Terminal Adapter
delay before answering 140
dial mode 141
feature codes 284
system tones 142
used off-site 142
used on-site 142
Answer keys
assigning 36
using 222
answering calls
Call Pickup 221
external 218
hunt group calls 219
internal 218
queued 218
Trunk Answer 222
ATA
See Analogue Terminal Adapter
attendant phone
choosing 179
Auto Attendant 176
Autobumping
feature 269
Autodial
external number 256
internal number 256
using intercom key 257
Automatic Telephone Relocation 134
auxiliary ringer
programming 101
P0905531 Issue 01
B
Background Music
On hold 122
programming 122
using 214
Barring calls
using restriction filters 74
Basic password 161
British Telecom
address 30
Broadcast 115
C
Call barring
using restriction filters 74
Call Camping
feature 233
Call capture
settings that enhance 24
Call Duration Timer 262
Call Forward All Calls 27
Call Forward All Calls (ISDN) 283
Call Forward No Answer
setting up 92
Call Forward on Busy
setting up 94
Call holding 226
Call Information
symbols 263
viewing 262
Call Log
Autobumping 269
erasing password 166
feature 264
Logit 266
password 265
programming 268
selecting options 107
setting extension 264
viewing 266
Call Park 230
Call Pickup
directed 221
group 221
Call Pickup Directed
programming 128
Call queuing 218
Call Routing 148
Call Services
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Index 308
Auto Called ID 167
1st Display 166
Camp timeout
programming 123
CAPN
See Central Answering Position
CCR customised greetings 183
CCR destinations 184
CCR group
adding or removing extensions 180
Central Answering Position
feature 203
line assignment 33
Class of Service password
changing 85, 240
changing dialling filter 85
erasing 86
feature 240
setting up 84
using 240
Conference Call
feature 237
Conference tone 127
contrast adjustment 109
Control extensions
definition 146
programming 155
copying
programming 135
COS
See Class of service password
Custom Call Routing
customising 178
greetings 176
testing 184
turning on and off 179
Cyclical 115
D
destination code 153
Dialling
setting 208
dialling features
long tones 272
pause 272
Programmed Release 273
Recall 273
Run/Stop 273
Wait for dialtone 274
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Dialling filters
AC15A private circuit 74
AC15A private circuits 83
extensions 74
lines 74
overriding 80
dialling modes 208
dialling options 108
dialling restriction
defaults 75
Digital Network Adapter
features 278
Direct-Dial extension
assigning a telephone 70, 98
external extension 71
internal extension 70
programming 70
using 242
disconnecting accidentally 223
display
common feature messages 204
contrast 109, 209
keys 8
language 109
VIOC 109
DNA
See Digital Network Adapter
DND
See Do Not Disturb
Do Not Disturb
feature 214
Do Not Disturb on Busy
cancelling 95
setting up 94, 95
E
exchange code 236
extension
Alarm 130
locking off 86
locking on 86
naming 62
programming 92
relocation 134
restriction filters 77
F
feature 202
Analogue Terminal Adapter feature
P0905531 Issue 01
Index 309
codes 284
Autobumping 269
Autodial 256
Automatic hold 226
Background Music 214
Call Camping 233
Call Duration Timer 262
Call Forward All Calls 250
Call Forward All Calls (ISDN) 283
Call Forward No Answer 92
Call Forward on Busy 94
Call Information services 262
Call Park 230
Call Pickup, directed 221
Call Pickup, group 221
Call queuing 218
Class of Service passwords 240
Conference Call 237
Contrast adjustment 109
Dialling modes 208
Do Not Disturb 214
Exclusive hold 226
Group Listen 223
Hold 226
hunt groups 219
Key Inquiry 209
Last Number Redial 87
Line Pool 236
Line redirection 252
Logit 266
Long tones 272
Messages 242
Paging 245
Pause 272
Personal Speed Dial 215
Priority Call 232
Privacy 218
Programmed Release 273
Recall 273
Remote access packages 170
Ring Again 260
Ring type 210
Ring volume 211
Ringing service 146
Run/Stop 273
Saved Number Redial 88
Services 146
Show time 262
Static Time 262
P0905531 Issue 01
System Speed Dial 256
Time and Date 262
Transfer 233
Trunk Answer 222
Voice Call 246
Voice Call deny 246
Wait for dialtone 274
feature display messages 204
G
greetings
customised 182
pre-recorded 181
Group Listen 223
H
Handsfree
answerback 96
muting 220
programming 95
using 219
Held line reminder 127
Hold
automatic 226
exclusive 226
Hotline
assigning a telephone 100
bypassing 101, 260
cancelling 100
using 260
hunt group calls 219
Hunt groups
adding and removing members 113
and videophones 112
assigning and unassigning lines 114
checking metrics 119
hunt delay 116
if line is busy 116
member order 113
method of distribution 115
overflow extension 118
queue timeout 117
I
intercom keys
programming 35
using for Autodial 257
interrupting a call
See Priority Call
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Index 310
I-RAD password 163
ISDN terminals
Call Forward All Calls 283
feature codes 283
features 276
line access 237
supported services 277
transfer call 283
using 237
K
key assignments
M7100N telephone 201
M7208N telephone 200
M7310N telephone 199
Key Inquiry 209
keys
Autodial 257
Call Log 267
display 8
keypad 7, 8
labelling 209
moving 210
telephone 7
L
language
display 109
VIOC 109
Last Number Redail
preventing 87
Line
assigning filters 78
assignment 32
naming 63
line access
ISDN terminals 284
Line Pool
feature 236
Line pool access
programming 34
Line redirection
cancelling 253
feature 252
using 252
line redirection 49
Line Ringing
See Line assignment
lines
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
assigning to a hunt group 114
Listen on hold 226
listening in a group 223
locking
an extension 86
log calls
See Call Log
log space
allocation 129
Logit 266
long tones
feature 272
M
Maintenance
overview 188
map, programming 11
Memory keys
erasing 259
feature code 258
programming 258
Messages
erasing 244
feature display 204
replying 243
sending 242
viewing 243
moving telephones 134
music
background 122
On hold 122
M7100N telephone 200
M7208N telephone 200
M7310N telephone 199
M7324N telephone 198
N
Network callback 126
Night Service
See Services
Night service 146
Norstar feature codes 280
numbering plan 149
O
ONN blocking (CLIR) 48
Originating Line Identification 231
overlay, programming 6
overriding
P0905531 Issue 01
Index 311
Call Forward 250
pulse dialling 274
P
Q
Page timeout 129
Page tone 128
Page zone
setting up 97
Paging
features 245
programming 98
remote 245
Park Mode
programming 124
Park timeout
programming 124
Parking a call 230
Passwords
Admin 161
Basic 161
Call Log 265
erasing 166
I-RAD 163
SAPLUS 160
using 22
Personal Speed Dial
feature 215
Pickup group
setting up 97
Prime line 34
Priority Call
allowing 99
feature 232
Privacy 218
programming
Call Log 268
Call Pickup 221
Control extensions 155
copying 135
Do Not Disturb on Busy 94
extensions 92
map of Administrator Plus programming 10
maps of 11
memory keys 258
overlay 6
programming basics
entering passwords 9
programming system features
Page timeout 129
Page tone 128
queued call 218
P0905531 Issue 01
R
re-allocating log space 129
Recall
setting up 89
Receive tones 102
receiver volume
programming 123
redialling a number 258
Redirect ring
setting up 101
turning off 101
regulatory information 4
relocation of extension 134
Remind delay 127
Remote access
defaults for packages 170
filter 83
packages 170
Remote paging 245
ring
Ringing service 146
Ring Again
cancelling 260
feature 260
Ring type
changing 110
feature 210
Ring volume
feature 211
Ringing service 146
activating 146
cancelling 146
feature 146
routing
DIA calls 231
Routing service
programming 148
Run/Stop 273
S
SAPLUS password 160
Saved Number Redial
preventing 88
Sequential 115
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Index 312
Services
Control extensions 155
Restriction service 146, 148
Ringing service 146
Routing 148
schedule 146
Trunk Answer 222
turning off with a feature code 155
Show time 262
Software Keys 54
Speed Dial
personal 107, 215
system 58
using 215
Static Time
feature 262
Symbols
keys 263
System Answer 176
customised greetings 182
pre-recorded greetings 181
testing 184
turning on and off 178
System ID 54
System Speed Dial
assigning a number 58
bypassing restrictions 60
feature 256
setting up 58
system version number 188
transferring a call
feature 233
ISDN 283
Troubleshooting 191–194
Trunk Answer
using 222
V
version number
system software 188
VIOC
See Visually Handicapped Operator
Console
Visually Impaired Operator Console 109,
202
Voice Call
answering 246
features 246
making 246
muting tones 246
preventing 246
W
Wait for dialtone
feature 274
Symbols
£ 251
› 251
T
telephone
moving 134
M7100N 200
M7208N 200
M7310N 199
M7324N 198
telephone keys 7
testing
Custom Call Routing 184
System Answer 184
Time and Date
changing 65–68
feature 262
Show 262
timing a call 262
Transfer Callback delay
programming 125
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0905531 Issue 01
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement